37. Advanced-control timers (TIM1/TIM8)
TIM8 is only available on STM32U3B5/3C5 devices. Refer to the device datasheet for more details.
37.1 TIM1/TIM8 introduction
The advanced-control timers (TIM1/TIM8) consist of a 16-bit autoreload counter driven by a programmable prescaler.
It may be used for a variety of purposes, including measuring the pulse lengths of input signals (input capture) or generating output waveforms (output compare, PWM, complementary PWM with dead-time insertion).
Pulse lengths and waveform periods can be modulated from a few microseconds to several milliseconds using the timer prescaler and the RCC clock controller prescalers.
The advanced-control (TIM1/TIM8) and general-purpose (TIMy) timers are completely independent, and do not share any resources. They can be synchronized together as described in Section 37.3.30: Timer synchronization .
37.2 TIM1/TIM8 main features
TIM1/TIM8 timer features include:
- • 16-bit up, down, up/down autoreload counter.
- • 16-bit programmable prescaler allowing dividing (also “on the fly”) the counter clock frequency by any factor from 1 to 65536.
- • Up to six independent channels for:
- – Input capture (but channels 5 and 6)
- – Output compare
- – PWM generation (edge and center-aligned mode)
- – One-pulse mode output
- • Complementary outputs with programmable dead-time
- • Synchronization circuit to control the timer with external signals and to interconnect several timers together.
- • Repetition counter to update the timer registers only after a given number of cycles of the counter.
- • 2 break inputs to put the timer’s output signals in a safe user selectable configuration.
- • Interrupt/DMA generation on the following events:
- – Update: counter overflow/underflow, counter initialization (by software or internal/external trigger)
- – Trigger event (counter start, stop, initialization, or count by internal/external trigger)
- – Input capture
- – Output compare
- • Supports incremental (quadrature) encoder and hall-sensor circuitry for positioning purposes
- • Trigger input for external clock or cycle-by-cycle current management
- • ADC synchronization for jitter-free sampling points
37.3 TIM1/TIM8 functional description
37.3.1 Block diagram
Figure 357. Advanced-control timer block diagram

The block diagram illustrates the internal architecture of an advanced-control timer. At the top, the Trigger controller receives inputs from tim_etr0 (processed by a Polarity selection & edge detector & prescaler and Input filter ), tim_trc , and tim_tifp1 / tim_tifp2 . It generates tim_trgo and tim_trgo2 signals. Below it, the Slave controller mode handles Reset, enable, up/down, count signals. The Encoder interface connects to tim_tifp1 and tim_tifp2 . The IRQ interface and DMA interface are connected to the 32-bit APB bus and various internal signals. The Auto-reload register and REP register are linked to the UEV (Update Event) signal. The Clock prescaler provides tim_psc_ck to the tim_cnt_ck input. The Capture/Compare 1 register through 6 register are connected to tim_ic1 through tim_ic4 (via Prescaler and Input filter & edge detector ) and to tim_oc1ref through tim_oc6ref (via DTG and Output control ). The Break and Break2 circuitry receives tim_sys_brk , TIM_BKIN , tim_brk_cmp[8:1] , TIM_BKIN2 , and tim_brk2_cmp[8:1] signals and generates tim_brk and tim_brk2 signals. The tim_ocref_clr signal is generated by the tim_ocref_clr_int signal and the tim_etr signal.
Notes:
[Reg] Preload registers transferred to active registers on UEV event according to control bit
→ Event
↗ Interrupt & DMA output
MSV45751V6
- 1. This feature is not available on all timers, refer to Section 37.3.2: TIM1/TIM8 pins and internal signals .
- 2. See Figure 404: Break and Break2 circuitry overview for details.
37.3.2 TIM1/TIM8 pins and internal signals
The tables in this section summarize the TIM inputs and outputs
Table 378. TIM input/output pins
| Pin name | Signal type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| TIM_CH1 TIM_CH2 TIM_CH3 TIM_CH4 | Input/output | Timer multi-purpose channels. Each channel can be used for capture, compare or PWM. TIM_CH1 and TIM_CH2 can also be used as external clock (below 1/4 of the tim_ker_ck clock), external trigger and quadrature encoder inputs. TIM_CH1, TIM_CH2 and TIM_CH3 can be used to interface with digital hall effect sensors. |
| TIM_CH1N TIM_CH2N TIM_CH3N TIM_CH4N | Output | Timer complementary outputs, derived from TIM_CHx outputs with the possibility to have deadtime insertion. |
| TIM_ETR | Input | External trigger input. This input can be used as external trigger or as external clock source. This input can receive a clock with a frequency higher than the tim_ker_ck if the tim_etr_in prescaler is used. |
| TIM_BKIN TIM_BKIN2 | Input/output | Break and Break2 inputs. These inputs can also be configured in bidirectional mode. |
Table 379. TIM internal input/output signals
| Internal signal name | Signal type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| tim_ti1_in[15:0] tim_ti2_in[15:0] tim_ti3_in[15:0] tim_ti4_in[15:0] | Input | Internal timer inputs bus. The tim_ti1_in[15:0] and tim_ti2_in[15:0] inputs can be used for capture or as external clock (below 1/4 of the tim_ker_ck clock) and for quadrature encoder signals. |
| tim_etr[15:0] | Input | External trigger internal input bus. These inputs can be used as trigger, external clock or for hardware cycle-by-cycle pulsewidth control. These inputs can receive clock with a frequency higher than the tim_ker_ck if the tim_etr_in prescaler is used. |
| tim_itr[15:0] | Input | Internal trigger input bus. These inputs can be used for the slave mode controller or as a input clock (below 1/4 of the tim_ker_ck clock). |
| tim_trgo/tim_trgo2 | Output | Internal trigger outputs. These triggers are used by other timers and /or other peripherals. |
Table 379. TIM internal input/output signals (continued)
| Internal signal name | Signal type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| tim_ocref_clr[7:0] | Input | Timer tim_ocref_clr input bus. These inputs can be used to clear the tim_ocref signals, typically for hardware cycle-by-cycle pulsewidth control. |
| tim_brk_cmp[8:1] | Input | Break input for internal signals |
| tim_brk2_cmp[8:1] | Input | Break2 input for internal signals |
| tim_sys_brk[n:0] | Input | System break input. This input gathers the MCU's system level errors. |
| tim_pclk | Input | Timer APB clock |
| tim_ker_ck | Input | Timer kernel clock |
| tim_cc_it | Output | Timer capture/compare interrupt |
| tim_upd_it | Output | Timer update event interrupt |
| tim_brk_terr_jerr_it | Output | Timer break, break2, transition error and index error interrupt |
| tim_trgi_com_dir_idx_it | Output | Timer trigger, commutation, direction and index interrupt |
| tim_cc1_dma tim_cc2_dma tim_cc3_dma tim_cc4_dma | Output | Timer capture / compare 1..4 dma requests |
| tim_upd_dma | Output | Timer update dma request |
| tim_trgi_dma | Output | Timer trigger dma request |
| tim_com_dma | Output | Timer commutation dma request |
Tables below list the sources connected to the tim_ti[4:1] input multiplexers.
Table 380. Interconnect to the tim_ti1 input multiplexer
| tim_ti1 inputs | Sources | |
|---|---|---|
| TIM1 | TIM8 | |
| tim_ti1_in0 | TIM1_CH1 | TIM8_CH1 |
| tim_ti1_in1 | comp1_out | comp1_out |
| tim_ti1_in2 | comp2_out | comp2_out |
| tim_ti1_in[15:3] | Reserved | Reserved |
Table 381. Interconnect to the tim_ti2 input multiplexer
| tim_ti2 inputs | Sources | |
|---|---|---|
| TIM1 | TIM8 | |
| tim_ti2_in0 | TIM1_CH2 | TIM8_CH2 |
| tim_ti2_in[15:1] | Reserved | Reserved |
Table 382. Interconnect to the tim_ti3 input multiplexer
| tim_ti3 inputs | Sources | |
|---|---|---|
| TIM1 | TIM8 | |
| tim_ti3_in0 | TIM1_CH3 | TIM8_CH3 |
| tim_ti3_in[15:1] | Reserved | Reserved |
Table 383. Interconnect to the tim_ti4 input multiplexer
| tim_ti4 inputs | Sources | |
|---|---|---|
| TIM1 | TIM8 | |
| tim_ti4_in0 | TIM1_CH4 | TIM8_CH4 |
| tim_ti4_in[15:1] | Reserved | Reserved |
The table below lists the internal sources connected to the tim_itr input multiplexer.
Table 384. Internal trigger connection
| Timer internal trigger input signal | TIM1 | TIM8 |
|---|---|---|
| tim_itr0 | Reserved | tim1_trgo |
| tim_itr1 | tim2_trgo | tim2_trgo |
| tim_itr2 | tim3_trgo | tim3_trgo |
| tim_itr3 | tim4_trgo | tim4_trgo |
| tim_itr4 | Reserved | Reserved |
| tim_itr5 | tim8_trgo (1) | Reserved |
| tim_itr6 | tim15_trgo | tim15_trgo |
| tim_itr7 | tim16_oc1 | tim16_oc1 |
| tim_itr8 | tim17_oc1 | tim17_oc1 |
| tim_itr9 | tim12_trgo (1) | tim12_trgo |
| tim_itr[15:10] | Reserved | Reserved |
1. This connection is only available on STM32U3B5/3C5 devices.
Tables below list the internal sources connected to the tim_etr input multiplexer.
Table 385. Interconnect to the tim_etr input multiplexer
| Timer external trigger input signal | Timer external trigger signal assignment | |
|---|---|---|
| TIM1 | TIM8 | |
| tim_etr0 | TIM1_ETR | TIM8_ETR |
| tim_etr1 | comp1_out | comp1_out |
| tim_etr2 | comp2_out | comp2_out |
| tim_etr3 | MSIK | MSIK |
| tim_etr4 | HSI | HSI |
| tim_etr5 | Reserved | Reserved |
| tim_etr6 | ||
| tim_etr7 | ||
| tim_etr8 | adc1_awd1 | adc1_awd1 |
| tim_etr9 | adc1_awd2 | adc1_awd2 |
| tim_etr10 | adc1_awd3 | adc1_awd3 |
| tim_etr11 | adc2_awd1 | adc2_awd1 |
| tim_etr12 | adc2_awd2 | adc2_awd2 |
| tim_etr13 | adc2_awd3 | adc2_awd3 |
| tim_etr[15:14] | Reserved | Reserved |
Tables below list the sources connected to the tim_brk and tim_brk2inputs.
Table 386. Timer break interconnect
| tim_brk inputs | TIM1 | TIM8 |
|---|---|---|
| TIM_BKIN | TIM1_BKIN pin | TIM8_BKIN pin |
| tim_brk_cmp1 | comp1_out | comp1_out |
| tim_brk_cmp2 | comp2_out | comp2_out |
| tim_brk_cmp3 | hsp1_brk_out0 (1) | hsp1_brk_out0 (1) |
| tim_brk_cmp4 | hsp1_brk_out1 (1) | hsp1_brk_out1 (1) |
| tim_brk_cmp[8:5] | Reserved | Reserved |
1. This connection is only available on STM32U3B5/3C5 devices.
Table 387. Timer break2 interconnect
| tim_brk2 inputs | TIM1 | TIM8 |
|---|---|---|
| TIM_BKIN2 | TIM1_BKIN2 pin | TIM8_BKIN2 pin |
| tim_brk2_cmp1 | comp1_out | comp1_out |
| tim_brk2_cmp2 | comp2_out | comp2_out |
| tim_brk2 inputs | TIM1 | TIM8 |
|---|---|---|
| tim_brk2_cmp3 | hsp1_brk_out0 (1) | hsp1_brk_out0 (1) |
| tim_brk2_cmp4 | hsp1_brk_out1 (1) | hsp1_brk_out1 (1) |
| tim_brk2_cmp[8:5] | Reserved | Reserved |
1. This connection is only available on STM32U3B5/3C5 devices.
Table 388. System break interconnect| tim_sys_brk inputs | TIM1 | TIM8 | Enable bit in SYSCFG_CFGR2 register |
|---|---|---|---|
| tim_sys_brk0 | Cortex-M33 LOCKUP | Cortex-M33 LOCKUP | CLL |
| tim_sys_brk1 | Programmable voltage detector (PVD) | Programmable voltage detector (PVD) | PVDL |
| tim_sys_brk2 | SRAM parity error | SRAM parity error | SEL |
| tim_sys_brk3 | Flash memory double ECC error | Flash memory double ECC error | ECCL |
| tim_sys_brk4 | Clock security system (CSS) | Clock security system (CSS) | None (always enabled) |
The table below lists the internal sources connected to the tim_ocref_clr input multiplexer.
Table 389. Interconnect to the ocref_clr input multiplexer| Timer OCREF clear signal | Timer OCREF clear signal assignment | |
|---|---|---|
| TIM1 | TIM8 | |
| tim_ocref_clr0 | comp1_out | comp1_out |
| tim_ocref_clr1 | comp2_out | comp2_out |
| tim_ocref_clr[7:2] | Reserved | Reserved |
37.3.3 Time-base unit
The main block of the programmable advanced-control timer is a 16-bit counter with its related autoreload register. The counter can count up, down or both up and down. The counter clock can be divided by a prescaler.
The counter, the autoreload register and the prescaler register can be written or read by software, even when the counter is running.
The time-base unit includes:
- • Counter register (TIMx_CNT)
- • Prescaler register (TIMx_PSC)
- • Autoreload register (TIMx_ARR)
- • Repetition counter register (TIMx_RCR)
The autoreload register is preloaded. Writing to or reading from the autoreload register accesses the preload register. The content of the preload register are transferred into the
shadow register permanently or at each update event (UEV), depending on the autoreload preload enable bit (ARPE) in TIMx_CR1 register. The update event is sent when the counter reaches the overflow (or underflow when downcounting) and if the UDIS bit equals 0 in the TIMx_CR1 register. It can also be generated by software. The generation of the update event is described in detailed for each configuration.
The counter is clocked by the prescaler output tim_cnt_ck, which is enabled only when the counter enable bit (CEN) in TIMx_CR1 register is set (refer also to the slave mode controller description to get more details on counter enabling).
Note: The counter starts counting 1 clock cycle after setting the CEN bit in the TIMx_CR1 register.
Prescaler description
The prescaler divides the counter clock frequency by any factor from 1 to 65536. It is based on a 16-bit counter controlled through a 16-bit register (in the TIMx_PSC register). It can be changed on the fly as this control register is buffered. The new prescaler ratio is taken into account at the next update event.
Figure 358 and Figure 359 give some examples of the counter behavior when the prescaler ratio is changed on the fly.
Figure 358. Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 2

The timing diagram illustrates the behavior of the counter and prescaler when the prescaler division ratio is changed from 1 to 2. The signals shown are:
- tim_psc_ck : The input clock signal, shown as a high-frequency square wave.
- CEN : The counter enable bit, which is set high to enable the counter.
- tim_cnt_ck : The clock signal for the counter, which is the output of the prescaler.
- Counter register : The register that holds the current counter value. It shows values F7, F8, F9, FA, FB, FC, 00, 01, 02, 03.
- Update event (UEV) : A signal that is generated when the counter reaches an overflow or underflow, or when the prescaler division ratio is changed.
- Prescaler control register : The register that holds the prescaler division ratio. It is changed from 0 to 1.
- Prescaler buffer : A buffer that holds the new prescaler division ratio until the next update event. It is updated from 0 to 1 at the next update event.
- Prescaler counter : The counter that divides the input clock frequency. It is reset to 0 at the update event and then counts 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1.
The diagram shows that when the prescaler control register is changed from 0 to 1, the prescaler buffer is updated at the next update event. The prescaler counter is reset to 0 at the update event and then counts 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1. The counter register values are F7, F8, F9, FA, FB, FC, 00, 01, 02, 03. The update event (UEV) is generated at the overflow of the counter register (from FC to 00).
MSV50998V1
Figure 359. Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 4

The timing diagram illustrates the operation of an advanced-control timer (TIM1/TIM8) during a prescaler division change. The signals shown are:
- tim_psc_ck : Prescaler clock signal, a periodic square wave.
- CEN : Counter Enable signal, which is high to enable counting.
- tim_cnt_ck : Counter clock signal, derived from the prescaler output.
- Counter register : Shows the counter value. It counts from F7 to FC, then overflows to 00. After the prescaler division change, it counts from 00 to 01.
- Update event (UEV) : Generated when the counter overflows or when the prescaler division is updated.
- Prescaler control register : Shows the prescaler division value. It is initially 0 (division by 1) and is changed to 3 (division by 4) by writing a new value in TIMx_PSC.
- Prescaler buffer : A shadow register that latches the new prescaler division value (3) when the UEV occurs.
- Prescaler counter : Shows the prescaler counter value. It counts from 0 to 3 (division by 4) before overflowing to 0 again.
The diagram shows that the prescaler division change from 1 to 4 occurs when the prescaler control register is updated from 0 to 3. The prescaler buffer and prescaler counter reflect this change, with the prescaler counter counting from 0 to 3 before overflowing to 0 again. The counter register counts from F7 to FC, then overflows to 00. After the prescaler division change, it counts from 00 to 01.
MSV50999V1
37.3.4 Counter modes
Upcounting mode
In upcounting mode, the counter counts from 0 to the autoreload value (content of the TIMx_ARR register), then restarts from 0 and generates a counter overflow event.
If the repetition counter is used, the update event (UEV) is generated after upcounting is repeated for the number of times programmed in the repetition counter register (TIMx_RCR) + 1. Else the update event is generated at each counter overflow.
Setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register (by software or by using the slave mode controller) also generates an update event.
The UEV event can be disabled by software by setting the UDIS bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. This is to avoid updating the shadow registers while writing new values in the preload registers. Then no update event occurs until the UDIS bit has been written to 0. However, the counter restarts from 0, as well as the counter of the prescaler (but the prescale rate does not change). In addition, if the URS bit (update request selection) in TIMx_CR1 register is set, setting the UG bit generates an update event UEV but without setting the UIF flag (thus no interrupt or DMA request is sent). This is to avoid generating both update and capture interrupts when clearing the counter on the capture event.
When an update event occurs, all the registers are updated and the update flag (UIF bit in TIMx_SR register) is set (depending on the URS bit):
- • The repetition counter is reloaded with the content of TIMx_RCR register,
- • The autoreload shadow register is updated with the preload value (TIMx_ARR),
- • The buffer of the prescaler is reloaded with the preload value (content of the TIMx_PSC register).
The following figures show some examples of the counter behavior for different clock frequencies when TIMx_ARR = 0x36.
Figure 360. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1

The timing diagram illustrates the operation of a timer counter. The top signal, tim_psc_ck , is a periodic square wave representing the prescaler clock. Below it, CEN (Counter Enable) is shown as a signal that goes high to enable counting. The tim_cnt_ck signal is a square wave that is active only when CEN is high. The Counter register displays a sequence of values: 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07. Vertical dashed lines indicate key timing points: the first line marks the start of counting when CEN goes high, and the second line marks the overflow point when the counter reaches 0x36 and resets to 0x00. At this overflow point, the Counter overflow , Update event (UEV) , and Update interrupt flag (UIF) signals all transition from low to high.
MSv50997V1
Figure 361. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2

This timing diagram illustrates the operation of a counter when the internal clock is divided by 2. The top signal, tim_psc_ck , is a periodic square wave. The CEN (Counter Enable) signal is shown as a high-level pulse. The tim_cnt_ck signal is a square wave with a frequency half that of tim_psc_ck . The Counter register displays a sequence of values: 0034, 0035, 0036, 0000, 0001, 0002, and 0003. Vertical dashed lines indicate the rising edges of tim_cnt_ck that correspond to the counter increments. The Counter overflow signal goes high when the counter reaches 0036 and returns low at 0000. The Update event (UEV) and Update interrupt flag (UIF) signals also go high at the overflow point (0036 to 0000) and return low at the next clock edge (0000 to 0001). The diagram is labeled MSv62300V1 in the bottom right corner.
Figure 362. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4

This timing diagram illustrates the operation of a counter when the internal clock is divided by 4. The tim_psc_ck signal is a periodic square wave. The CEN signal is high. The tim_cnt_ck signal has a frequency one-quarter that of tim_psc_ck . The Counter register shows values 0035, 0036, 0000, and 0001. Vertical dashed lines mark the rising edges of tim_cnt_ck . The Counter overflow , Update event (UEV) , and Update interrupt flag (UIF) signals all go high at the transition from 0036 to 0000 and return low at the transition from 0000 to 0001. The diagram is labeled MSv62301V1 in the bottom right corner.
Figure 363. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N

This timing diagram illustrates the counter's operation when the internal clock is divided by N. The top signal, tim_psc_ck, is a periodic square wave. Below it, tim_cnt_ck is a square wave with a frequency that is N times lower than tim_psc_ck. The Counter register is shown with values 1F, 20, and 00. The Counter overflow signal is a pulse that occurs when the counter reaches its maximum value (indicated by a slash on the register line) and rolls over to 00. The Update event (UEV) and Update interrupt flag (UIF) are shown as pulses that coincide with the counter overflow. The diagram is labeled MSv62302V1.
Figure 364. Counter timing diagram, update event when ARPE = 0 (TIMx_ARR not preloaded)

This timing diagram shows the counter's operation when ARPE = 0 and the TIMx_ARR register is not preloaded. The signals shown are tim_psc_ck, CEN (Counter Enable), tim_cnt_ck, Counter register, Counter overflow, Update event (UEV), Update interrupt flag (UIF), and the Auto-reload preload register. The Counter register values are 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07. The Counter overflow, UEV, and UIF signals are pulses that occur when the counter reaches its maximum value (36) and rolls over to 00. The Auto-reload preload register is shown with values FF and 36. An arrow points to the register with the text 'Write a new value in TIMx_ARR'. The diagram is labeled MSv62303V1.
Figure 365. Counter timing diagram, update event when ARPE = 1
(TIMx_ARR preloaded)

The timing diagram illustrates the operation of an advanced-control timer in upcounting mode with ARPE = 1. The signals shown are:
- tim_psc_ck : Prescaler clock signal, a periodic square wave.
- CEN : Counter Enable signal, which goes high to enable counting.
- tim_cnt_ck : Counter clock signal, derived from tim_psc_ck when CEN is high.
- Counter register : Shows the counter values: F0, F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07. The counter increments from F0 to F5, then overflows to 00.
- Counter overflow : A pulse generated when the counter overflows from F5 to 00.
- Update event (UEV) : A pulse generated at the counter overflow.
- Update interrupt flag (UIF) : A flag that is set by the UEV.
- Auto-reload preload register : Shows the value F5 being updated to 36. An arrow points to the update point.
- Auto-reload shadow register : Shows the value F5 being updated to 36 at the UEV.
A note at the bottom left indicates: "Write a new value in TIMx_ARR". The diagram is labeled MSV62304V1.
Downcounting mode
In downcounting mode, the counter counts from the autoreload value (content of the TIMx_ARR register) down to 0, then restarts from the autoreload value and generates a counter underflow event.
If the repetition counter is used, the update event (UEV) is generated after downcounting is repeated for the number of times programmed in the repetition counter register (TIMx_RCR) + 1. Else the update event is generated at each counter underflow.
Setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register (by software or by using the slave mode controller) also generates an update event.
The UEV update event can be disabled by software by setting the UDIS bit in TIMx_CR1 register. This is to avoid updating the shadow registers while writing new values in the preload registers. Then no update event occurs until UDIS bit has been written to 0. However, the counter restarts from the current autoreload value, whereas the counter of the prescaler restarts from 0 (but the prescale rate doesn't change).
In addition, if the URS bit (update request selection) in TIMx_CR1 register is set, setting the UG bit generates an update event UEV but without setting the UIF flag (thus no interrupt or DMA request is sent). This is to avoid generating both update and capture interrupts when clearing the counter on the capture event.
When an update event occurs, all the registers are updated and the update flag (UIF bit in TIMx_SR register) is set (depending on the URS bit):
- • The repetition counter is reloaded with the content of TIMx_RCR register.
- • The buffer of the prescaler is reloaded with the preload value (content of the TIMx_PSC register).
- • The autoreload active register is updated with the preload value (content of the TIMx_ARR register). Note that the autoreload is updated before the counter is reloaded, so that the next period is the expected one.
The following figures show some examples of the counter behavior for different clock frequencies when TIMx_ARR = 0x36.
Figure 366. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1

The timing diagram illustrates the operation of a timer counter. The top signal, tim_psc_ck , is a periodic square wave representing the prescaler clock. Below it, CEN (Counter Enable) is shown as a signal that goes high to enable counting. When CEN is high, the tim_cnt_ck signal, which is the internal counter clock, becomes active. The Counter register displays a sequence of values: 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, followed by a reload to 36, then 35, 34, 33, 32, 31, 30, and 2F. Vertical dashed lines indicate key timing points: the first marks the start of counting, and the second marks the point where the counter reaches 00 and reloads to 36. At this reload point, three signals are shown: Counter underflow (cnt_udf) generates a short pulse, Update event (UEV) goes high, and Update interrupt flag (UIF) also goes high. The diagram is labeled with the code MSV62305V1 in the bottom right corner.
Figure 367. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2

This timing diagram illustrates the operation of an advanced-control timer with the internal clock divided by 2. The signals shown are:
- tim_psc_ck : Prescaler clock signal, shown as a high-frequency square wave.
- CEN : Counter Enable signal, which goes high to start counting.
- tim_cnt_ck : Counter clock signal, which is the prescaler clock divided by 2.
- Counter register : Shows the count values: 0002, 0001, 0000, 0036, 0035, 0034, 0033. The count decreases from 0002 to 0000, then rolls over to 0036 and continues to decrease.
- Counter underflow : A pulse that goes high when the counter reaches 0000 and is about to roll over.
- Update event (UEV) : A pulse that goes high when the counter reaches 0000.
- Update interrupt flag (UIF) : A pulse that goes high when the counter reaches 0000.
Vertical dashed lines indicate the rising edges of the tim_cnt_ck signal. The counter register values are updated on the falling edges of tim_cnt_ck. The underflow, UEV, and UIF signals are synchronized with the counter reaching 0000.
MSV62306V1
Figure 368. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4

This timing diagram illustrates the operation of an advanced-control timer with the internal clock divided by 4. The signals shown are:
- tim_psc_ck : Prescaler clock signal, shown as a high-frequency square wave.
- CEN : Counter Enable signal, which goes high to start counting.
- tim_cnt_ck : Counter clock signal, which is the prescaler clock divided by 4.
- Counter register : Shows the count values: 0001, 0000, 0000, 0001. The count decreases from 0001 to 0000, then rolls over to 0000 and continues to 0001.
- Counter underflow : A pulse that goes high when the counter reaches 0000 and is about to roll over.
- Update event (UEV) : A pulse that goes high when the counter reaches 0000.
- Update interrupt flag (UIF) : A pulse that goes high when the counter reaches 0000.
Vertical dashed lines indicate the rising edges of the tim_cnt_ck signal. The counter register values are updated on the falling edges of tim_cnt_ck. The underflow, UEV, and UIF signals are synchronized with the counter reaching 0000.
MSV62307V1
Figure 369. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N

This timing diagram illustrates the operation of a timer counter when the internal clock is divided by N. The signals shown are:
- tim_psc_ck : A periodic square wave representing the prescaler clock.
- tim_cnt_ck : A signal that is high whenever tim_psc_ck is high, indicating the active counting clock.
- Counter register : Shows the counter's value. It starts at 20 (hex), counts down to 1F (hex), then overflows to 00 (hex) and continues counting up to 36 (hex).
- Counter underflow : A pulse that goes high when the counter reaches 00 (hex).
- Update event (UEV) : A pulse that goes high when the counter reaches 00 (hex).
- Update interrupt flag (UIF) : A flag that is set (goes high) when the counter reaches 00 (hex).
MSV62308V1
Figure 370. Counter timing diagram, update event when repetition counter is not used

This timing diagram shows the counter's behavior when an update event occurs while the repetition counter is not used. The signals shown are:
- tim_psc_ck : A periodic square wave representing the prescaler clock.
- CEN : Counter Enable signal, which is high during the counting period.
- tim_cnt_ck : The active counting clock, which is high when CEN is high and tim_psc_ck is high.
- Counter register : Shows the counter counting down from 05 (hex) to 00 (hex), then overflowing to 36 (hex) and continuing to count down through 35, 34, 33, 32, 31, 30, and 2F (hex).
- Counter underflow : A pulse that goes high when the counter reaches 00 (hex).
- Update event (UEV) : A pulse that goes high when the counter reaches 00 (hex).
- Update interrupt flag (UIF) : A flag that is set (goes high) when the counter reaches 00 (hex).
- Auto-reload preload register : Shows the register value changing from FF (hex) to 36 (hex) at the time of the update event. An arrow points to this transition with the text "Write a new value in TIMx_ARR".
MSV62309V1
Center-aligned mode (up/down counting)
In center-aligned mode, the counter counts from 0 to the autoreload value (content of the TIMx_ARR register) – 1, generates a counter overflow event, then counts from the
autoreload value down to 1 and generates a counter underflow event. Then it restarts counting from 0.
Center-aligned mode is active when the CMS bits in TIMx_CR1 register are not equal to 00. The Output compare interrupt flag of channels configured in output is set when: the counter counts down (Center aligned mode 1, CMS = 01), the counter counts up (Center aligned mode 2, CMS = 10) the counter counts up and down (Center aligned mode 3, CMS = 11).
In this mode, the DIR direction bit in the TIMx_CR1 register cannot be written. It is updated by hardware and gives the current direction of the counter.
The update event can be generated at each counter overflow and at each counter underflow or by setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register (by software or by using the slave mode controller) also generates an update event. In this case, the counter restarts counting from 0, as well as the counter of the prescaler.
The UEV update event can be disabled by software by setting the UDIS bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. This is to avoid updating the shadow registers while writing new values in the preload registers. Then no update event occurs until UDIS bit has been written to 0. However, the counter continues counting up and down, based on the current autoreload value.
In addition, if the URS bit (update request selection) in TIMx_CR1 register is set, setting the UG bit generates an UEV update event but without setting the UIF flag (thus no interrupt or DMA request is sent). This is to avoid generating both update and capture interrupts when clearing the counter on the capture event.
When an update event occurs, all the registers are updated and the update flag (UIF bit in TIMx_SR register) is set (depending on the URS bit):
- • The repetition counter is reloaded with the content of TIMx_RCR register
- • The buffer of the prescaler is reloaded with the preload value (content of the TIMx_PSC register)
- • The autoreload active register is updated with the preload value (content of the TIMx_ARR register). Note that if the update source is a counter overflow, the autoreload is updated before the counter is reloaded, so that the next period is the expected one (the counter is loaded with the new value).
The following figures show some examples of the counter behavior for different clock frequencies.
Figure 371. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1, TIMx_ARR = 0x6

This timing diagram illustrates the operation of an advanced-control timer in center-aligned mode 1. The top signal, tim_psc_ck , is a high-frequency square wave representing the prescaler clock. Below it, CEN (Counter Enable) is shown as a high-level signal. The tim_cnt_ck signal is a square wave with a frequency half that of tim_psc_ck . The Counter register displays a sequence of values: 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 05, 04, 03. This sequence shows the counter counting up from 04 to 06 and then back down to 03. The Counter underflow signal is a pulse that goes high when the counter reaches 00. The Counter overflow signal is a pulse that goes high when the counter reaches 06. The Update event (UEV) signal is a pulse that goes high when the counter reaches 00 or 06. The Update interrupt flag (UIF) signal is a pulse that goes high when the counter reaches 00 or 06 and remains high until it is manually cleared. The diagram is labeled MSv62310V1.
- 1. Here, center-aligned mode 1 is used (for more details refer to Section 37.6: TIM1/TIM8 registers ).
Figure 372. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2

This timing diagram illustrates the operation of an advanced-control timer with the internal clock divided by 2. The top signal, tim_psc_ck , is a high-frequency square wave. Below it, CEN (Counter Enable) is shown as a high-level signal. The tim_cnt_ck signal is a square wave with a frequency half that of tim_psc_ck . The Counter register displays a sequence of values: 0003, 0002, 0001, 0000, 0001, 0002, 0003. This sequence shows the counter counting down from 0003 to 0000 and then back up to 0003. The Counter underflow signal is a pulse that goes high when the counter reaches 0000. The Update event (UEV) signal is a pulse that goes high when the counter reaches 0000. The Update interrupt flag (UIF) signal is a pulse that goes high when the counter reaches 0000 and remains high until it is manually cleared. The diagram is labeled MSv62311V1.
Figure 373. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4, TIMx_ARR = 0x36

This timing diagram illustrates the counter's behavior during an overflow. The tim_psc_ck signal is a periodic square wave. The CEN signal is a high-level enable. The tim_cnt_ck signal is a square wave with a frequency one-fourth that of tim_psc_ck . The Counter register shows values 0034, 0035, 0036, and 0035. The Counter overflow signal pulses high when the counter reaches 0036. The Update event (UEV) and Update interrupt flag (UIF) signals pulse high at the overflow point. A note at the bottom left states: "Note: Here, center_aligned mode 2 or 3 is updated with an UIF on overflow". The diagram is labeled MSv62312V1 in the bottom right.
Figure 374. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N

This timing diagram illustrates the counter's behavior during an underflow. The tim_psc_ck signal is a periodic square wave. The tim_cnt_ck signal is a square wave with a frequency divided by N from tim_psc_ck . The Counter register shows values 20, 1F, 01, and 00. The Counter underflow signal pulses high when the counter reaches 00. The Update event (UEV) and Update interrupt flag (UIF) signals pulse high at the underflow point. The diagram is labeled MSv62313V1 in the bottom right.
Figure 375. Counter timing diagram, update event with ARPE = 1 (counter underflow)

The timing diagram illustrates the operation of an advanced-control timer (TIM1/TIM8) with the ARPE bit set to 1. The signals shown are:
- tim_psc_ck : Prescaler clock signal, a periodic square wave.
- CEN : Counter Enable signal, which is high to enable counting.
- tim_cnt_ck : Counter clock signal, derived from the prescaler clock.
- Counter register : Shows the counter value counting down from 06 to 00, then rolling over to 01 and continuing up to 07.
- Counter underflow : A signal that pulses high when the counter reaches 00 and rolls over.
- Update event (UEV) : A signal that pulses high in response to the counter underflow.
- Update interrupt flag (UIF) : A flag that is set by the update event.
- Auto-reload preload register : Contains the value 36. It is initially marked as 'FD' (Full Dump). An arrow indicates a write to TIMx_ARR. The value is updated to 36.
- Auto-reload active register : Contains the value 36. It is initially marked as 'FD'. The value is updated to 36 at the time of the update event.
The diagram shows that when the counter reaches 00, an underflow occurs, triggering an update event (UEV) and setting the UIF flag. Simultaneously, the auto-reload active register is updated with the value from the preload register (36). The counter then resumes counting from 01.
MSV62314V1
Figure 376. Counter timing diagram, Update event with ARPE = 1 (counter overflow)

The timing diagram illustrates the operation of an advanced-control timer (TIM1/TIM8) in counter mode with ARPE = 1. The signals shown are:
- tim_psc_ck : Prescaler clock signal, a periodic square wave.
- CEN : Counter enable signal, which is high to enable counting.
- tim_cnt_ck : Counter clock signal, derived from tim_psc_ck when CEN is high.
- Counter register : Shows the counter value decreasing from F7 to 2F. The sequence is F7, F8, F9, FA, FB, FC, 36, 35, 34, 33, 32, 31, 30, 2F. The overflow occurs when the counter transitions from FC to 36.
- Counter overflow : A pulse generated when the counter overflows from FC to 36.
- Update event (UEV) : A pulse generated when the counter overflows from FC to 36.
- Update interrupt flag (UIF) : A pulse generated when the counter overflows from FC to 36.
- Auto-reload preload register : Shows the value FD being written and then 36 being loaded when the counter overflows.
- Write a new value in TIMx_ARR : An arrow indicating the write operation to the preload register.
- Auto-reload active register : Shows the value FD being written and then 36 being loaded when the counter overflows.
MSv62315V1
37.3.5 Repetition counter
Section 37.3.3: Time-base unit describes how the update event (UEV) is generated with respect to the counter overflows/underflows. It is actually generated only when the repetition counter has reached zero. This can be useful when generating PWM signals.
This means that data are transferred from the preload registers to the shadow registers (TIMx_ARR autoreload register, TIMx_PSC prescaler register, but also TIMx_CCRx capture/compare registers in compare mode) every N+1 counter overflows or underflows, where N is the value in the TIMx_RCR repetition counter register.
The repetition counter is decremented:
- • At each counter overflow in upcounting mode,
- • At each counter underflow in downcounting mode,
- • At each counter overflow and at each counter underflow in center-aligned mode.
- Although this limits the maximum number of repetition to 32768 PWM cycles, it makes it possible to update the duty cycle twice per PWM period. When refreshing compare registers only once per PWM period in center-aligned mode, maximum resolution is \( 2 \times T_{ck} \) , due to the symmetry of the pattern.
The repetition counter is an autoreload type; the repetition rate is maintained as defined by the TIMx_RCR register value (refer to Figure 377 ). When the update event is generated by software (by setting the UG bit in TIMx_EGR register) or by hardware through the slave mode controller, it occurs immediately whatever the value of the repetition counter is and the repetition counter is reloaded with the content of the TIMx_RCR register.
In Center aligned mode, for odd values of RCR, the update event occurs either on the overflow or on the underflow depending on when the RCR register was written and when the counter was launched: if the RCR was written before launching the counter, the UEV occurs on the underflow. If the RCR was written after launching the counter, the UEV occurs on the overflow.
For example, for RCR = 3, the UEV is generated each 4th overflow or underflow event depending on when the RCR was written.
Figure 377. Update rate examples depending on mode and TIMx_RCR register settings

The figure displays timing diagrams for update rates in two modes: Counter-aligned and Edge-aligned (Upcounting and Downcounting). The rows represent different TIMx_RCR settings: 0, 1, 2, 3, and 3 with re-synchronization. The Counter (TIMx_CNT) is shown as a sawtooth wave. The Update Event (UEV) is indicated by arrows at the start of each counter cycle. In the 'TIMx_RCR = 3 and re-synchronization' row, a dashed line indicates a software (SW) re-synchronization point.
Legend:
UEV → Update event: Preload registers transferred to active registers and update interrupt generated
Update Event if the repetition counter underflow occurs when the counter is equal to the auto-reload value.
MSv31195V1
37.3.6 External trigger input
The timer features an external trigger input tim_etr_in. It can be used as:
- • external clock (external clock mode 2, see Section 37.3.7 )
- • trigger for the slave mode (see Section 37.3.30 )
- • PWM reset input for cycle-by-cycle current regulation (see Section 37.3.9 )
Figure 378 below describes the tim_etr_in input conditioning. The input polarity is defined with the ETP bit in TIMxSMCR register. The trigger can be prescaled with the divider programmed by the ETPS[1:0] bitfield and digitally filtered with the ETF[3:0] bitfield. The resulting signal (tim_etr) is available for three purposes: as an external clock, to condition
the output (typically to reset a PWM output for a current limitation), and as a trigger for the Slave mode controller.
Figure 378. External trigger input block
![Figure 378. External trigger input block diagram. The diagram shows the signal flow from various sources to the external trigger input (tim_etr_in) and then to the output (tim_etrp) and slave mode controller. Sources include TIMx_AF1[17:14], TIM_ETR (tim_etr0), and tim_etr[15:1] (1). The signal passes through a multiplexer (controlled by ETRSEL[3:0] in TIMx_AF1), an inverter (controlled by ETP in TIMx_SMCR), a divider (controlled by ETPS[1:0] in TIMx_SMCR), and a filter downcounter (controlled by ETF[3:0] in TIMx_SMCR). The output tim_etrp is connected to the Output mode controller, CK_PSC circuitry, and the Slave mode controller. The diagram is labeled MSv62316V2.](/RM0487-STM32U3/3aa59a35e5091c67525100da6f00e585_img.jpg)
The
tim_etr_in
input comes from multiple sources: input pins (default configuration), or internal sources. The selection is done with the
ETRSEL[3:0]
bitfield in the
TIMx_AF1
register.
Refer to
Section 37.3.2: TIM1/TIM8 pins and internal signals
for the list of sources connected to the
etr_in
input in the product.
37.3.7 Clock selection
The counter clock can be provided by the following clock sources:
- • Internal clock (
tim_ker_ck) - • External clock mode1: external input pin (
tim_ti1ortim_ti2) - • External clock mode2: external trigger input (
tim_etr_in) - • Encoder mode
Internal clock source (
tim_ker_ck
)
If the slave mode controller is disabled (
SMS = 000
), then the
CEN
,
DIR
(in the
TIMx_CR1
register) and
UG
bits (in the
TIMx_EGR
register) are actual control bits and can be changed only by software (except
UG
which remains cleared automatically). As soon as the
CEN
bit is written to 1, the prescaler is clocked by the internal clock
tim_ker_ck
.
Figure 379 shows the behavior of the control circuit and the upcounter in normal mode, without prescaler.
Figure 379. Control circuit in normal mode, internal clock divided by 1

External clock source mode 1
This mode is selected when SMS = 111 in the TIMx_SMCR register. The counter can count at each rising or falling edge on a selected input.
Figure 380. tim_ti2 external clock connection example
![Block diagram for Figure 380 showing the connection of TIM_CH2 to the external clock source. It includes components like TIMx_TISEL (TI2SEL[3:0]), TIM_CH2 input (tim_ti2_in0, tim_ti2_in[15:1]), a Filter block (ICF[3:0]), an Edge detector (tim_ti2f_rising, tim_ti2f_falling), a CC2P block (TIMx_CCER), and a TIMx_SMCR register (TS[4:0]). The diagram shows the selection of external clock modes (Encoder mode, External clock mode 1, External clock mode 2, Internal clock mode) based on the TS[4:0] register value and other control signals like tim_trgi, tim_etrp, and tim_ker_ck.](/RM0487-STM32U3/4e6f7cef2d90b62c0c23de05f1981bce_img.jpg)
1. Codes ranging from 01000 to 11111 are reserved.
For example, to configure the upcounter to count in response to a rising edge on the tim_ti2 input, use the following procedure:
- 1. Configure channel 2 to detect rising edges on the tim_ti2 input by writing CC2S = 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register.
- 2. Configure the input filter duration by writing the IC2F[3:0] bits in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (if no filter is needed, keep IC2F = 0000).
- 3. Select rising edge polarity by writing CC2P = 0 and CC2NP = 0 in the TIMx_CCER register.
- 4. Configure the timer in external clock mode 1 by writing SMS = 111 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
- 5. Select tim_ti2 as the trigger input source by writing TS = 00110 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
- 6. Enable the counter by writing CEN = 1 in the TIMx_CR1 register.
Note: The capture prescaler is not used for triggering, it is not necessary to configure it.
When a rising edge occurs on tim_ti2, the counter counts once and the TIF flag is set.
The delay between the rising edge on tim_ti2 and the actual clock of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on tim_ti2 input.
Figure 381. Control circuit in external clock mode 1

External clock source mode 2
This mode is selected by writing ECE = 1 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
The counter counts at each rising or falling edge on the external trigger input tim_etr_in.
The Figure 382 gives an overview of the external trigger input block.
Figure 382. External trigger input block
![Figure 382. External trigger input block diagram showing the signal flow from TIMx_AF1[17:14] and TIM_ETR (tim_etr0) through a multiplexer, filter downcounter, and divider to the encoder mode, external clock mode 1, external clock mode 2, and internal clock mode. The diagram also shows control signals like tim_trgi, tim_etr, tim_etr1, and tim_ker_ck, and configuration registers like TIMx_SMCR, ETP, ETPS[1:0], ETF[3:0], ECE, and SMS[2:0].](/RM0487-STM32U3/2f3b67a7be8b8aa090d91ebcf001c61f_img.jpg)
The diagram illustrates the external trigger input block for advanced-control timers (TIM1/TIM8). It shows the signal flow from the TIMx_AF1[17:14] and TIM_ETR (tim_etr0) pins through a multiplexer to the tim_etr_in input. This signal is then processed by a filter downcounter and a divider (/1, /2, /4, /8) to produce the tim_etrp signal. The tim_etrp signal is then used by the encoder mode, external clock mode 1, external clock mode 2, and internal clock mode blocks. The diagram also shows the control signals and configuration registers used to configure the external trigger input block, including TIMx_SMCR, ETP, ETPS[1:0], ETF[3:0], ECE, and SMS[2:0].
- 1. Refer to Section 37.3.2: TIM1/TIM8 pins and internal signals .
For example, to configure the upcounter to count each 2 rising edges on tim_etr_in, use the following procedure:
- 1. As no filter is needed in this example, write ETF[3:0] = 0000 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
- 2. Set the prescaler by writing ETPS[1:0] = 01 in the TIMx_SMCR register
- 3. Select rising edge detection on the tim_etr_in input by writing ETP = 0 in the TIMx_SMCR register
- 4. Enable external clock mode 2 by writing ECE = 1 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
- 5. Enable the counter by writing CEN = 1 in the TIMx_CR1 register.
The counter counts once each 2 tim_etr_in rising edges.
The delay between the rising edge on tim_etr_in and the actual clock of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on the tim_etrp signal. As a consequence, the maximum frequency which can be correctly captured by the counter is at most 1/4 of tim_ker_ck frequency. When the ETRP signal is faster, the user must apply a division of the external signal by a proper ETPS prescaler setting.
Figure 383. Control circuit in external clock mode 2

The diagram shows the relationship between several signals and the counter register in external clock mode 2. The signals are:
- tim_ker_ck : A periodic square wave clock signal.
- CEN : Counter Enable signal, shown as a high-level signal.
- tim_etr_in : External clock input signal.
- tim_etrp : External clock prescaler output signal.
- tim_etr : External clock output signal.
- tim_cnt_ck and tim_psc_ck : Counter and prescaler clock signals, which are high-frequency pulses.
- Counter register : Shows the count values 34, 35, and 36. The count increments on the rising edges of the tim_cnt_ck signal.
37.3.8 Capture/compare channels
Each capture/compare channel is built around a capture/compare register (including a shadow register), an input stage for capture (with digital filter, multiplexing, and prescaler, except for channels 5 and 6) and an output stage (with comparator and output control).
Figure 384 to Figure 387 give an overview of one capture/compare channel.
The input stage samples the corresponding tim_tix input to generate a filtered signal tim_tixf. Then, an edge detector with polarity selection generates a signal (tim_tixfpy) which can be used as trigger input by the slave mode controller or as the capture command. It is prescaled before the capture register (ICxPS).
Figure 384. Capture/compare channel (example: channel 1 input stage)

The diagram illustrates the input stage of a capture/compare channel (example: channel 1). The components and signal flow are:
- Inputs : TIM_CH1 and tim_ti1_in[15:1] are multiplexed to form tim_ti1_in0 .
- Multiplexers : TIMx_TISEL (TI1SEL[3:0]) controls the selection of the input signal.
- Filter downcounter : Takes tim_ti1_in0 and fors as input. It is controlled by ICF[3:0] and TIMx_CCMR1 . It outputs the filtered signal tim_ti1f .
- Edge detector : Takes tim_ti1f as input and generates tim_ti1f_rising and tim_ti1f_falling signals.
- Multiplexer (01) : Selects between tim_ti1f_rising (input 0) and tim_ti1f_falling (input 1) based on CC1P/CC1NP and TIMx_CCER . It outputs tim_ti1f_ed to the slave mode controller and tim_ti1_fp1 .
- Multiplexer (10) : Selects between tim_ti2f_rising (from channel 2, input 0) and tim_ti2f_falling (from channel 2, input 1) based on CC1S[1:0] and TIMx_CCMR1 . It outputs tim_ic1 .
- Multiplexer (11) : Selects between tim_trc (from slave mode controller, input 0) and tim_ic1 (input 1) based on ICPS[1:0] and TIMx_CCMR1 . It outputs tim_ic1f .
- Dividers : tim_ic1f is divided by /1, /2, /4, /8 based on CC1E and TIMx_CCER .
The output stage generates an intermediate waveform which is then used for reference: tim_ocxref (active high). The polarity acts at the end of the chain.
Figure 385. Capture/compare channel 1 main circuit

The diagram illustrates the internal architecture of Capture/compare channel 1. At the top, an APB Bus connects to an MCU-peripheral interface . This interface is connected via a 16/32-bit bus to the Capture/compare preload register and the compare shadow register . Below these registers is a Counter . A Comparator block compares the Counter value with the CCR1 value, outputting CNT>CCR1 and CNT=CCR1 signals. The Input mode on the left uses OR gates to combine signals CC1S[1] , CC1S[0] , IC1PS , CC1E , CC1G , and TIMx_EGR to control the Capture operation into the preload register. The Output mode on the right uses OR gates to combine CC1S[1] , CC1S[0] , OC1PE , and UEV (from time base unit) to control the Compare transfer from the shadow register to the preload register. The OC1PE signal is also connected to a box labeled OC1PE and TIMx_CCMR1 . The diagram is labeled MSv63030V1 in the bottom right corner.
Figure 386. Output stage of capture/compare channel (channel 1, idem ch. 2, 3 and 4)
![Figure 386: Output stage of capture/compare channel (channel 1, idem ch. 2, 3 and 4). This block diagram shows the internal logic for generating the tim_oc1 output. At the top, the TIMx_SMCR register's OCCS field is connected to a 2-to-1 multiplexer. The inputs are tim_ocref_clr (0) and tim_etr (1). The output of this MUX is tim_ocref_clr_int. This signal, along with CNT>CCR1 and CNT=CCR1, feeds into the Output mode controller. The controller also receives inputs from TIMx_CCMR1 (OC1CE, OC1M[3:0]). The controller's output goes to an Output selector and also to the master mode controller. The Output selector produces tim_oc1ref. This signal, along with a '0' input, feeds into a Dead-time generator. The Dead-time generator also receives DTG[7:0] from TIMx_BDTR and produces tim_oc1_dt and tim_oc1n_dt. These signals, along with '0' inputs, feed into two 2-to-1 multiplexers. The first MUX has inputs x0, 01, 11 and is controlled by CC1P from TIMx_CCER. Its output goes to an Output enable circuit. The second MUX has inputs 10, 0x and is controlled by CC1NP from TIMx_CCER. Its output also goes to an Output enable circuit. These circuits produce tim_oc1 and tim_oc1n. They are controlled by CC1NE and CC1E from TIMx_CCER, and MOE, OSSI, OSSR from TIMx_BDTR. Finally, OIS1 and OIS1N from TIMx_CR2 are also inputs to these circuits. The diagram is labeled MSv62323V3.](/RM0487-STM32U3/c51f5cf09ceb55fa98b1e223708c3ed1_img.jpg)
- 1. tim_ocxref, where x is the rank of the complementary channel
Figure 387. Output stage of capture/compare channel (channel 5, idem ch. 6)
![Figure 387: Output stage of capture/compare channel (channel 5, idem ch. 6). This block diagram shows the internal logic for generating the tim_oc5 output. It follows a similar structure to Figure 386. The TIMx_SMCR register's OCCS field is connected to a 2-to-1 multiplexer with inputs tim_ocref_clr (0) and tim_etr (1). The output is tim_ocref_clr_int. This signal, along with CNT > CCR5 and CNT = CCR5, feeds into the Output mode controller. The controller also receives inputs from TIMx_CCMR3 (OC5CE, OC5M[3:0]). The controller's output goes to an Output selector and also to the master mode controller. The Output selector produces tim_oc5ref. This signal, along with a '0' input, feeds into a 2-to-1 multiplexer controlled by CC5E from TIMx_CCER. The output of this MUX goes to another 2-to-1 multiplexer controlled by CC5P from TIMx_CCER. The output of the second MUX goes to an Output enable circuit, which produces tim_oc5<sup>(1)</sup>. This circuit is controlled by CC5E from TIMx_CCER, MOE, OSSI from TIMx_BDTR, and OIS5 from TIMx_CR2. The diagram is labeled MSv62324V3.](/RM0487-STM32U3/0ebe51c7451f00d368496a8d82551310_img.jpg)
- 1. Not available externally.
The capture/compare block is made of one preload register and one shadow register. Write and read always access the preload register.
In capture mode, captures are actually done in the shadow register, which is copied into the preload register.
In compare mode, the content of the preload register is copied into the shadow register which is compared to the counter.
37.3.9 Input capture mode
In Input capture mode, the capture/compare registers (TIMx_CCRx) are used to latch the value of the counter after a transition detected by the corresponding ICx signal. When a capture occurs, the corresponding CCxIF flag (TIMx_SR register) is set and an interrupt or a DMA request can be sent if they are enabled. If a capture occurs while the CCxIF flag was already high, then the overcapture flag CCxOF (TIMx_SR register) is set. CCxIF can be cleared by software by writing it to 0 or by reading the captured data stored in the TIMx_CCRx register. CCxOF is cleared when it is written with 0.
The following example shows how to capture the counter value in TIMx_CCR1 when tim_ti1 input rises. To do this, use the following procedure:
- • Select the active input: TIMx_CCR1 must be linked to the tim_ti1 input, so write the CC1S bits to 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. As soon as CC1S becomes different from 00, the channel is configured in input, and the TIMx_CCR1 register becomes read-only.
- • Program the appropriate input filter duration in relation with the signal connected to the timer (when the input is one of the tim_xix (ICxF bits in the TIMx_CCMRx register). Let's imagine that, when toggling, the input signal is not stable during at most five internal clock cycles. We must program a filter duration longer than these five clock cycles. We can validate a transition on tim_ti1 when eight consecutive samples with the new level have been detected (sampled at \( f_{DTS} \) frequency). Then write IC1F bits to 0011 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register.
- • Select the edge of the active transition on the tim_ti1 channel by writing CC1P and CC1NP bits to 0 in the TIMx_CCER register (rising edge in this case).
- • Program the input prescaler. In our example, we wish the capture to be performed at each valid transition, so the prescaler is disabled (write IC1PS bits to 00 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register).
- • Enable capture from the counter into the capture register by setting the CC1E bit in the TIMx_CCER register.
- • If needed, enable the related interrupt request by setting the CC1IE bit in the TIMx_DIER register, and/or the DMA request by setting the CC1DE bit in the TIMx_DIER register.
When an input capture occurs:
- • The TIMx_CCR1 register gets the value of the counter on the active transition.
- • CC1IF flag is set (interrupt flag). CC1OF is also set if at least two consecutive captures occurred whereas the flag was not cleared.
- • An interrupt is generated depending on the CC1IE bit.
- • A DMA request is generated depending on the CC1DE bit.
In order to handle the overcapture, it is recommended to read the data before the overcapture flag. This is to avoid missing an overcapture which may happen after reading the flag and before reading the data.
Note: IC interrupt and/or DMA requests can be generated by software by setting the corresponding CCxG bit in the TIMx_EGR register.
37.3.10 PWM input mode
This mode is used to measure both the period and the duty cycle of a PWM signal connected to single tim_tix input:
- • The TIMx_CCR1 register holds the period value (interval between two consecutive rising edges).
- • The TIMx_CCR2 register holds the pulsewidth (interval between two consecutive rising and falling edges).
This mode is a particular case of input capture mode. The set-up procedure is similar with the following differences:
- • Two ICx signals are mapped on the same tim_tixfp1 input.
- • These two ICx signals are active on edges with opposite polarity.
- • One of the two tim_tixfp signals is selected as trigger input and the slave mode controller is configured in reset mode.
The period and the pulsewidth of a PWM signal applied on tim_ti1 can be measured using the following procedure:
- • Select the active input for TIMx_CCR1: write the CC1S bits to 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (tim_ti1 selected).
- • Select the active polarity for tim_ti1fp1 (used both for capture in TIMx_CCR1 and counter clear): write the CC1P and CC1NP bits to 0 (active on rising edge).
- • Select the active input for TIMx_CCR2: write the CC2S bits to 10 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (tim_ti1 selected).
- • Select the active polarity for tim_ti1fp2 (used for capture in TIMx_CCR2): write the CC2P and CC2NP bits to CC2P/CC2NP = 10 (active on falling edge).
- • Select the valid trigger input: write the TS bits to 00101 in the TIMx_SMCR register (tim_ti1fp1 selected).
- • Configure the slave mode controller in reset mode: write the SMS bits to 0100 in the TIMx_SMCR register.
- • Enable the captures: write the CC1E and CC2E bits to 1 in the TIMx_CCER register.
Figure 388. PWM input mode timing

The timing diagram shows the relationship between the input signal
tim_ti1
, the counter
TIMx_CNT
, and the capture/compare registers
TIMx_CCR1
and
TIMx_CCR2
.
tim_ti1: Input signal. It shows a high pulse followed by a low pulse, then another high pulse.TIMx_CNT: Counter values. The counter increments from 0000 to 0004 during the first high pulse oftim_ti1. Whentim_ti1goes low, the counter continues from 0000 to 0003. Whentim_ti1goes high again, the counter resets to 0000 and increments to 0004.TIMx_CCR1: Capture register 1. It captures the value 0004 at the rising edge of the secondtim_ti1pulse.TIMx_CCR2: Capture register 2. It captures the value 0002 at the falling edge of the firsttim_ti1pulse.
Annotations below the diagram indicate:
- IC1 capture, IC2 capture, reset counter (at the rising edge of the second
tim_ti1pulse). - IC2 capture, pulse width measurement (at the falling edge of the first
tim_ti1pulse). - IC1 capture, pulse width measurement (at the rising edge of the second
tim_ti1pulse).
MSv62325V1
37.3.11 Forced output mode
In output mode (
CCxS
bits = 00 in the
TIMx_CCMRx
register), each output compare signal (
tim_ocxref
and then
tim_ocx/tim_ocxn
) can be forced to active or inactive level directly by software, independently of any comparison between the output compare register and the counter.
To force an output compare signal (
tim_ocxref/tim_ocx
) to its active level, user just needs to write 0101 in the
OCxM
bits in the corresponding
TIMx_CCMRx
register. Thus
tim_ocxref
is forced high (
tim_ocxref
is always active high) and
tim_ocx
get opposite value to
CCxP
polarity bit.
For example:
CCxP
= 0 (
tim_ocx
active high) =>
tim_ocx
is forced to high level.
The
tim_ocxref
signal can be forced low by writing the
OCxM
bits to 0100 in the
TIMx_CCMRx
register.
Anyway, the comparison between the
TIMx_CCRx
shadow register and the counter is still performed and allows the flag to be set. Interrupt and DMA requests can be sent accordingly. This is described in the output compare mode section below.
37.3.12 Output compare mode
This function is used to control an output waveform or indicate when a period of time has elapsed. Channels 1 to 4 can be output, while channel 5 and 6 are only available inside the microcontroller (for instance, for compound waveform generation or for ADC triggering).
When a match is found between the capture/compare register and the counter, the output compare function:
- • Assigns the corresponding output pin to a programmable value defined by the output compare mode (
OCxMbits in theTIMx_CCMRxregister) and the output polarity (CCxPbit in theTIMx_CCERregister). The output pin can keep its level (OCXM= 0000), be
set active (OCxM = 0001), be set inactive (OCxM = 0010) or can toggle (OCxM = 0011) on match.
- • Sets a flag in the interrupt status register (CCxIF bit in the TIMx_SR register).
- • Generates an interrupt if the corresponding interrupt mask is set (CCXIE bit in the TIMx_DIER register).
- • Sends a DMA request if the corresponding enable bit is set (CCxDE bit in the TIMx_DIER register, CCDS bit in the TIMx_CR2 register for the DMA request selection).
The TIMx_CCRx registers can be programmed with or without preload registers using the OCxPE bit in the TIMx_CCMRx register.
In output compare mode, the update event UEV has no effect on tim_ocxref and tim_ocx output. The timing resolution is one count of the counter. Output compare mode can also be used to output a single pulse (in One-pulse mode).
Procedure
- 1. Select the counter clock (internal, external, prescaler).
- 2. Write the desired data in the TIMx_ARR and TIMx_CCRx registers.
- 3. Set the CCxIE bit if an interrupt request is to be generated.
- 4. Select the output mode. For example:
- – Write OCxM = 0011 to toggle tim_ocx output pin when CNT matches CCRx
- – Write OCxPE = 0 to disable preload register
- – Write CCxP = 0 to select active high polarity
- – Write CCxE = 1 to enable the output
- 5. Enable the counter by setting the CEN bit in the TIMx_CR1 register.
The TIMx_CCRx register can be updated at any time by software to control the output waveform, provided that the preload register is not enabled (OCxPE = 0, else TIMx_CCRx shadow register is updated only at the next update event UEV). An example is given in Figure 389 .
Figure 389. Output compare mode, toggle on tim_oc1

37.3.13 PWM mode
Pulse width modulation mode is used to generate a signal with a frequency determined by the value of the TIMx_ARR register and a duty cycle determined by the value of the TIMx_CCRx register.
The PWM mode can be selected independently on each channel (one PWM per tim_ocx output) by writing 0110 (PWM mode 1) or 0111 (PWM mode 2) in the OCxM bits in the TIMx_CCMRx register. The corresponding preload register must be enabled by setting the OCxPE bit in the TIMx_CCMRx register, and eventually the autoreload preload register (in upcounting or center-aligned modes) by setting the ARPE bit in the TIMx_CR1 register.
As the preload registers are transferred to the shadow registers only when an update event occurs, before starting the counter, all registers must be initialized by setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register.
tim_ocx polarity is software programmable using the CCxP bit in the TIMx_CCER register. It can be programmed as active high or active low. tim_ocx output is enabled by a combination of the CCxE, CCxNE, MOE, OSSI, and OSSR bits (TIMx_CCER and TIMx_BDTR registers). Refer to the TIMx_CCER register description for more details.
In PWM mode (1 or 2), TIMx_CNT and TIMx_CCRx are always compared to determine whether \( TIMx\_CCRx \leq TIMx\_CNT \) or \( TIMx\_CNT \leq TIMx\_CCRx \) (depending on the direction of the counter).
The timer is able to generate PWM in edge-aligned mode or center-aligned mode depending on the CMS bits in the TIMx_CR1 register.
PWM edge-aligned mode
- Upcounting configuration
Upcounting is active when the DIR bit in the TIMx_CR1 register is low. Refer to Upcounting mode .
In the following example, the mode is PWM mode 1. The reference PWM signal tim_ocxref is high as long as TIMx_CNT < TIMx_CCRx else it becomes low. If the compare value in TIMx_CCRx is greater than the autoreload value (in TIMx_ARR ) then tim_ocxref is held at 1. If the compare value is zero then tim_ocxref is held at 0.
Figure 390 shows some edge-aligned PWM waveforms in an example where TIMx_ARR = 8.
Figure 390. Edge-aligned PWM waveforms (ARR = 8)

The figure is a timing diagram illustrating edge-aligned PWM waveforms for a timer with an autoreload value (ARR) of 8. The counter register (TIMx_CNT) is shown at the top, with values 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 0, 1. Vertical dashed lines mark the counter values 0, 4, 8, and 0 again. Below the counter, four sets of waveforms are shown for different compare register (CCR) values:
- CCRx=4: The tim_ocxref signal is high from counter value 0 to 4, and low from 4 to 8. The CCxIF flag is set at counter value 4 and reset at 8.
- CCRx=8: The tim_ocxref signal is high from 0 to 8, and low from 8 to 0. The CCxIF flag is set at 8 and reset at 0.
- CCRx>8: The tim_ocxref signal is held at '1' (high) throughout the cycle. The CCxIF flag is not set.
- CCRx=0: The tim_ocxref signal is held at '0' (low) throughout the cycle. The CCxIF flag is not set.
MSV62327V1
- Downcounting configuration
Downcounting is active when DIR bit in TIMx_CR1 register is high. Refer to the Downcounting mode
In PWM mode 1, the reference signal tim_ocxref is low as long as TIMx_CNT > TIMx_CCRx else it becomes high. If the compare value in TIMx_CCRx is greater than the autoreload value in TIMx_ARR , then tim_ocxref is held at 1. 0% PWM is not possible in this mode.
PWM center-aligned mode
Center-aligned mode is active when the CMS bits in TIMx_CR1 register are different from 00 (all the remaining configurations having the same effect on the tim_ocxref/tim_ocx signals). The compare flag is set when the counter counts up, when it counts down or both when it counts up and down depending on the CMS bits configuration. The direction bit
(DIR) in the TIMx_CR1 register is updated by hardware and must not be changed by software. Refer to Center-aligned mode (up/down counting) .
Figure 391 shows some center-aligned PWM waveforms in an example where:
- • TIMx_ARR = 8
- • PWM mode is the PWM mode 1
- • The flag is set when the counter counts down corresponding to the center-aligned mode 1 selected for CMS = 01 in TIMx_CR1 register.
Figure 391. Center-aligned PWM waveforms (ARR = 8)

The figure illustrates the relationship between the counter register values and the resulting PWM waveforms for different capture/compare register (CCRx) settings. The counter register values are shown at the top, cycling from 0 to 8 and back down to 0. Vertical dashed lines indicate the timing points for each CCRx value. The 'tim_ocxref' waveform shows the output state (high or low) for each CCRx. The 'CCxIF' flag status is shown for CMS=01, CMS=10, and CMS=11 settings. Arrows indicate the specific counter values that trigger the flag or waveform changes.
| CCRx | tim_ocxref | CCxIF (CMS=01) | CCxIF (CMS=10) | CCxIF (CMS=11) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 4 | High from 4 to 4 | Set at 4 (down) | Set at 4 (up) | Set at 4 (up) |
| 7 | High from 7 to 7 | Set at 7 (down) | Set at 7 (up) | Set at 7 (up) |
| 8 | High from 8 to 8 | Set at 8 (down) | Set at 8 (up) | Set at 8 (up) |
| >8 | High from 8 to 8 | Set at 8 (down) | Set at 8 (up) | Set at 8 (up) |
| 0 | Low from 0 to 0 | Set at 0 (down) | Set at 0 (up) | Set at 0 (up) |
Hints on using center-aligned mode:
- • When starting in center-aligned mode, the current up-down configuration is used. It means that the counter counts up or down depending on the value written in the DIR bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. Moreover, the DIR and CMS bits must not be changed at the same time by the software.
- • Writing to the counter while running in center-aligned mode is not recommended as it can lead to unexpected results. In particular:
- – The direction is not updated if a value greater than the autoreload value is written in the counter (TIMx_CNT > TIMx_ARR). For example, if the counter was counting up, it continues to count up.
- – The direction is updated if 0 or the TIMx_ARR value is written in the counter but no update event UEV is generated.
- • The safest way to use center-aligned mode is to generate an update by software (setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register) just before starting the counter and not to write the counter while it is running.
Dithering mode
The PWM mode effective resolution can be increased by enabling the dithering mode, using the DITHEN bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. This applies to both the CCR (for duty cycle resolution increase) and ARR (for PWM frequency resolution increase).
The operating principle is to have the actual CCR (or ARR) value slightly changed (adding or not one timer clock period) over 16 consecutive PWM periods, with predefined patterns. This allows a 16-fold resolution increase, considering the average duty cycle or PWM period. Figure 392 presents the dithering principle applied to four consecutive PWM cycles.
Figure 392. Dithering principle

When the dithering mode is enabled, the register coding is changed as follows (see Figure 393 for example):
- • The four LSBs are coding for the enhanced resolution part (fractional part).
- • The MSBs are left-shifted to the bits 19:4 and are coding for the base value.
Note: The following sequence must be followed when resetting the DITHEN bit:
- 1. CEN and ARPE bits must be reset.
- 2. The DITHEN bit must be reset.
- 3. The CCIF flags must be cleared.
- 4. The CEN bit can be set (eventually with ARPE = 1).
Figure 393. Data format and register coding in dithering mode

The diagram illustrates the data format and register coding in dithering mode. It consists of two register diagrams. The first diagram, labeled 'Register format in dithering mode', shows a 20-bit register with bits b19 to b0. The register is split into two parts: the MSB (Most Significant Bit) which is a 16-bit integer part, and the LSB (Least Significant Bit) which is a 4-bit fractional part. The second diagram, labeled 'Example', shows a specific register value of 326. This value is split into two parts: 20 for the integer part and 6 for the fractional part. Arrows point from these values to a description: 'Base compare value is 20 during 16 periods' and 'Additional 6 cycles are spread over the 16 periods'. The diagram is labeled MSv45753V2.
The minimum frequency is given by the following formula:
Note: The maximum TIMx_ARR and TIMxCCRy values are limited to 0xFFFEF in dithering mode (corresponds to 65534 for the integer part and 15 for the dithered part).
As shown on Figure 394, the dithering mode is used to increase the PWM resolution whatever the PWM frequency.
Figure 394. PWM resolution vs frequency

Figure 394 is a graph showing PWM resolution (Y-axis) versus PWM frequency (X-axis). The Y-axis has markers for 20-bit and 16-bit. The X-axis has a marker for \( F_{\text{PWM min}} \) . Two curves are shown: "Dithering" and "No Dithering". Both curves start at the minimum frequency and decrease as frequency increases. The "Dithering" curve starts at 20-bit resolution, while the "No Dithering" curve starts at 16-bit resolution. A vertical dashed line at \( F_{\text{PWM min}} \) connects the starting points of both curves to the X-axis. The identifier MSv47464V2 is in the bottom right corner of the graph area.
The duty cycle and/or period changes are spread over 16 consecutive periods, as described in Figure 395 .
Figure 395. PWM dithering pattern

The figure illustrates the PWM dithering pattern across 16 counter periods. The registers and their values are as follows:
- Counter period: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
- CCR1 value: 322
- Compare1 value: 21, 20, 20, 20, 20, 20, 20, 20, 21, 20, 20, 20, 20, 20, 20, 20
- CCR2 value: 326
- Compare2 value: 21, 20, 21, 20, 21, 20, 20, 20, 21, 20, 21, 20, 21, 20, 20, 20
- CCR3 value: 334
- Compare3 value: 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 20, 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 20
- CCR4 value: 336
- Compare4 value: 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 21
- ARR value: 643
- Auto-Reload value: 41, 40, 40, 40, 41, 40, 40, 40, 41, 40, 40, 40, 40, 40, 40, 40
MSV45755V1
The autoreload and compare values increments are spread following specific patterns described in Table 390 . The dithering sequence is done to have increments distributed as evenly as possible and minimize the overall ripple.
Table 390. CCR and ARR register change dithering pattern
| LSB value | PWM period | |||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | |
| 0000 | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
| 0001 | +1 | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
| 0010 | +1 | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | +1 | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
| 0011 | +1 | - | - | - | +1 | - | - | - | +1 | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
| 0100 | +1 | - | - | - | +1 | - | - | - | +1 | - | - | - | +1 | - | - | - |
| 0101 | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | - | - | +1 | - | - | - | +1 | - | - | - |
| 0110 | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | - | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | - | - |
Table 390. CCR and ARR register change dithering pattern (continued)
| LSB value | PWM period | |||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | |
| 0111 | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | - | - |
| 1000 | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - |
| 1001 | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - |
| 1010 | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - |
| 1011 | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - |
| 1100 | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | - |
| 1101 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | - |
| 1110 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | - |
| 1111 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | - |
The dithering mode is also available in center-aligned PWM mode (CMS bits in TIMx_CR1 register are not equal to 00). In this case, the dithering pattern is applied over eight consecutive PWM periods, considering the up and down counting phases as shown in Figure 396.
Figure 396. Dithering effect on duty cycle in center-aligned PWM mode

MSV50904V1
Table 391 shows how the dithering pattern is added in center-aligned PWM mode.
Table 391. CCR register change dithering pattern in center-aligned PWM mode
| LSB value | PWM period | |||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | |||||||||
| Up | Dn | Up | Dn | Up | Dn | Up | Dn | Up | Dn | Up | Dn | Up | Dn | Up | Dn | |
| 0000 | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
| 0001 | +1 | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
| 0010 | +1 | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | +1 | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
| 0011 | +1 | - | - | - | +1 | - | - | - | +1 | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
| 0100 | +1 | - | - | - | +1 | - | - | - | +1 | - | - | - | +1 | - | - | - |
| 0101 | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | - | - | +1 | - | - | - | +1 | - | - | - |
| 0110 | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | - | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | - | - |
Table 391. CCR register change dithering pattern in center-aligned PWM mode (continued)
| LSB value | PWM period | |||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | |||||||||
| Up | Dn | Up | Dn | Up | Dn | Up | Dn | Up | Dn | Up | Dn | Up | Dn | Up | Dn | |
| 0111 | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | - | - |
| 1000 | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - |
| 1001 | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - |
| 1010 | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - |
| 1011 | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | - | +1 | - |
| 1100 | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | - |
| 1101 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | - |
| 1110 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | - | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | - |
| 1111 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | +1 | - |
37.3.14 Asymmetric PWM mode
Asymmetric mode allows two center-aligned PWM signals to be generated with a programmable phase shift. While the frequency is determined by the value of the TIMx_ARR register, the duty cycle and the phase-shift are determined by a pair of TIMx_CCRx register. One register controls the PWM during up-counting, the second during down counting, so that PWM is adjusted every half PWM cycle:
- - tim_oc1refc (or tim_oc2refc) is controlled by TIMx_CCR1 and TIMx_CCR2
- - tim_oc3refc (or tim_oc4refc) is controlled by TIMx_CCR3 and TIMx_CCR4
Asymmetric PWM mode can be selected independently on two channel (one tim_ocx output per pair of CCR registers) by writing 1110 (Asymmetric PWM mode 1) or 1111 (Asymmetric PWM mode 2) in the OCxM bits in the TIMx_CCMRx register.
Note: The OCxM[3:0] bitfield is split into two parts for compatibility reasons, the most significant bit is not contiguous with the three least significant ones.
When a given channel is used as asymmetric PWM channel, its complementary channel can also be used. For instance, if an tim_oc1refc signal is generated on channel 1 (Asymmetric PWM mode 1), it is possible to output either the tim_oc2ref signal on channel 2, or an tim_oc2refc signal resulting from asymmetric PWM mode 1.
Figure 397 represents an example of signals that can be generated using asymmetric PWM mode (channels 1 to 4 are configured in asymmetric PWM mode 2). Together with the deadtime generator, this allows a full-bridge phase-shifted DC to DC converter to be controlled.
Figure 397. Generation of 2 phase-shifted PWM signals with 50% duty cycle

Counter register: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
tim_oc1refc
CCR1=0
CCR2=8
tim_oc3refc
CCR3=3
CCR4=5
MSV62329V1
37.3.15 Combined PWM mode
Combined PWM mode allows two edge or center-aligned PWM signals to be generated with programmable delay and phase shift between respective pulses. While the frequency is determined by the value of the TIMx_ARR register, the duty cycle and delay are determined by the two TIMx_CCRx registers. The resulting signals, tim_ocxrefc, are made of an OR or AND logical combination of two reference PWMs:
- • tim_oc1refc (or tim_oc2refc) is controlled by TIMx_CCR1 and TIMx_CCR2
- • tim_oc3refc (or tim_oc4refc) is controlled by TIMx_CCR3 and TIMx_CCR4
Combined PWM mode can be selected independently on two channels (one tim_ocx output per pair of CCR registers) by writing 1100 (Combined PWM mode 1) or 1101 (Combined PWM mode 2) in the OCxM bits in the TIMx_CCMRx register.
When a given channel is used as combined PWM channel, its complementary channel must be configured in the opposite PWM mode (for instance, one in Combined PWM mode 1 and the other in Combined PWM mode 2).
Note: The OCxM[3:0] bitfield is split into two parts for compatibility reasons, the most significant bit is not contiguous with the three least significant ones.
Figure 398 represents an example of signals that can be generated using combined PWM mode, obtained with the following configuration:
- • Channel 1 is configured in Combined PWM mode 2.
- • Channel 2 is configured in PWM mode 1.
- • Channel 3 is configured in Combined PWM mode 2.
- • Channel 4 is configured in PWM mode 1.
Figure 398. Combined PWM mode on channel 1 and 3

Combined PWM mode 1: \( tim\_oc1refc = tim\_oc1ref \text{ OR } tim\_oc2ref \)
Combined PWM mode 2: \( tim\_oc3refc = tim\_oc3ref \text{ AND } tim\_oc4ref \)
MSV74198V1
37.3.16 Combined 3-phase PWM mode
Combined 3-phase PWM mode allows one to three center-aligned PWM signals to be generated with a single programmable signal ANDed in the middle of the pulses. The \( tim\_oc5ref \) signal is used to define the resulting combined signal. The 3-bits \( GC5C[3:1] \) in the \( TIMx\_CCR5 \) allow selection on which reference signal the \( tim\_oc5ref \) is combined. The resulting signals, \( tim\_ocxrefc \) , are made of an AND logical combination of two reference PWMs:
- • If \( GC5C1 \) is set, \( tim\_oc1refc \) is controlled by \( TIMx\_CCR1 \) and \( TIMx\_CCR5 \) .
- • If \( GC5C2 \) is set, \( tim\_oc2refc \) is controlled by \( TIMx\_CCR2 \) and \( TIMx\_CCR5 \) .
- • If \( GC5C3 \) is set, \( tim\_oc3refc \) is controlled by \( TIMx\_CCR3 \) and \( TIMx\_CCR5 \) .
Combined 3-phase PWM mode can be selected independently on channels 1 to 3 by setting at least one of the 3-bits \( GC5C[3:1] \) .
Figure 399. 3-phase combined PWM signals with multiple trigger pulses per period

The figure is a timing diagram illustrating the relationship between various timer signals over two periods. At the top, the ARR (Auto-Reload Register) is shown as a constant value. Below it, CCR5 and CCR6 are shown as constant values. The CCR1, CCR4, CCR2, and CCR3 registers are shown as constant values. The Counter waveform is a sawtooth wave that ramps up from 0 to the ARR value and then resets. The tim_oc5ref, tim_oc1refc, tim_oc2refc, and tim_oc3refc signals are shown as step functions that change their state based on the Counter value. The Preload and Active waveforms show the preload value (100) and the active value (001) over time. The tim_oc4ref, tim_oc6ref, and tim_trgo2 signals are shown as step functions that change their state based on the Counter value. The tim_trgo2 signal shows trigger pulses synchronized with the PWM signals. The diagram is labeled with MSv62331V1 at the bottom right.
The tim_trgo2 waveform shows how the ADC can be synchronized on given 3-phase PWM signals. Refer to Section 37.3.31: ADC triggers for more details.
37.3.17 Complementary outputs and dead-time insertion
The advanced-control timers (TIM1/TIM8) can output two complementary signals and manage the switching-off and the switching-on instants of the outputs.
This time is generally known as dead-time and it has to be adjusted depending on the devices that are connected to the outputs and their characteristics (such as intrinsic delays of level-shifters, or delays due to power switches).
The polarity of the outputs (main output tim_ocx or complementary tim_ocxn) can be selected independently for each output. This is done by writing to the CCxP and CCxNP bits in the TIMx_CCER register.
The complementary signals tim_ocx and tim_ocxn are activated by a combination of several control bits: the CCxE and CCxNE bits in the TIMx_CCER register and the MOE, OISx, OISxN, OSSI, and OSSR bits in the TIMx_BDTR and TIMx_CR2 registers. Refer to Table 399: Output control bits for complementary tim_ocx and tim_ocxn channels with break feature for more details. In particular, the dead-time is activated when switching to the idle state (MOE falling down to 0).
Dead-time insertion is enabled by setting both CCxE and CCxNE bits, and the MOE bit if the break circuit is present. There is one 10-bit dead-time generator for each channel. From a
reference waveform
tim_ocxref
, it generates two outputs
tim_ocx
and
tim_ocxn
. If
tim_ocx
and
tim_ocxn
are active high:
- • The
tim_ocxoutput signal is the same as the reference signal except for the rising edge, which is delayed relative to the reference rising edge. - • The
tim_ocxnoutput signal is the opposite of the reference signal except for the rising edge, which is delayed relative to the reference falling edge.
If the delay is greater than the width of the active output (
tim_ocx
or
tim_ocxn
) then the corresponding pulse is not generated.
The following figures show the relationships between the output signals of the dead-time generator and the reference signal
tim_ocxref
considering
CCxP = 0
,
CCxNP = 0
,
MOE = 1
,
CCxE = 1
and
CCxNE = 1
in these examples.
Figure 400. Complementary output with symmetrical dead-time insertion

The
DTAE
bit in the
TIMx_DTR2
is used to differentiate the deadtime values for rising and falling edges of the reference signal, as shown on
Figure 401
.
In asymmetrical mode (
DTAE = 1
), the rising edge-referred deadtime is defined by the
DTG[7:0]
bitfield in the
TIMx_BDTR
register, while the falling edge-referred is defined by the
DTGF[7:0]
bitfield in the
TIMx_DTR2
register. The
DTAE
bit must be written before enabling the counter and must not be modified while
CEN = 1
.
It is possible to have the deadtime value updated on-the-fly during pwm operation, using a preload mechanism. The deadtime bitfield
DTG[7:0]
and
DTGF[7:0]
are preloaded when the
DTPE
bit is set, in the
TIMx_DTR2
register. The preload value is loaded in the active register on the next update event.
Note:
If the
DTPE
bit is enabled while the counter is enabled, any new value written since last update is discarded and previous value is used.
Figure 401. Asymmetrical deadtime

The diagram illustrates two sets of waveforms for tim_ocxref , tim_ocx , and tim_ocxn .
- Symmetrical deadtime (DTAE = 0): The top set shows tim_ocx and tim_ocxn signals with symmetrical deadtime. The deadtime interval is labeled DTG[7:0] at both the rising and falling edges of tim_ocxref .
- Asymmetrical deadtime (DTAE = 1): The bottom set shows tim_ocx and tim_ocxn signals with asymmetrical deadtime. The deadtime interval is labeled DTGF[7:0] at the rising edge and DTG[7:0] at the falling edge of tim_ocxref .
MSv62333V1
Figure 402. Dead-time waveforms with delay greater than the negative pulse

The diagram shows the waveforms for tim_ocxref , tim_ocx , and tim_ocxn . The tim_ocx signal has a negative pulse. The deadtime delay is indicated by a double-headed arrow labeled delay , which is shown to be greater than the duration of the negative pulse of tim_ocx .
MSv62334V1
Figure 403. Dead-time waveforms with delay greater than the positive pulse

The diagram shows the waveforms for tim_ocxref , tim_ocx , and tim_ocxn . The tim_ocx signal has a positive pulse. The deadtime delay is indicated by a double-headed arrow labeled delay , which is shown to be greater than the duration of the positive pulse of tim_ocx .
MSv62335V1
The dead-time delay is the same for each of the channels and is programmable with the DTG bits in the TIMx_BDTR register. Refer to Section 37.6.20: TIMx break and dead-time register (TIMx_BDTR)(x = 1, 8) for delay calculation.
Redirecting tim_ocxref to tim_ocx or tim_ocxn
In output mode (forced, output compare or PWM), tim_ocxref can be redirected to the tim_ocx output or to tim_ocxn output by configuring the CCxE and CCxNE bits in the TIMx_CCER register.
This is used to send a specific waveform (such as PWM or static active level) on one output while the complementary remains at its inactive level. Other alternative possibilities are to have both outputs at inactive level or both outputs active and complementary with dead-time.
Note: When only tim_ocxn is enabled (CCxE = 0, CCxNE = 1), it is not complemented and becomes active as soon as tim_ocxref is high. For example, if CCxNP = 0 then tim_ocxn = tim_ocxref. On the other hand, when both tim_ocx and tim_ocxn are enabled (CCxE = CCxNE = 1) tim_ocx becomes active when tim_ocxref is high whereas tim_ocxn is complemented and becomes active when tim_ocxref is low.
37.3.18 Using the break function
The purpose of the break function is to protect power switches driven by PWM signals generated with the timers. The two break inputs are usually connected to fault outputs of power stages and 3-phase inverters. When activated, the break circuitry shuts down the PWM outputs and forces them to a predefined safe state. A number of internal MCU events can also be selected to trigger an output shut-down.
The break features two channels. A break channel which gathers both system-level fault (clock failure, ECC/parity errors,...) and application fault (from input pins and built-in comparator), and can force the outputs to a predefined level (either active or inactive) after a deadtime duration. A break2 channel which only includes application faults and is able to force the outputs to an inactive state.
The output enable signal and output levels during break are depending on several control bits:
- • The MOE bit in TIMx_BDTR register is used to enable/disable the outputs by software and is reset in case of break or break2 event.
- • The OSSI bit in the TIMx_BDTR register defines whether the timer controls the output in inactive state or releases the control to the GPIO controller (typically to have it in Hi-Z mode)
- • The OISx and OISxN bits in the TIMx_CR2 register which are setting the output shut-down level, either active or inactive. The tim_ocx and tim_ocxn outputs cannot be set both to active level at a given time, whatever the OISx and OISxN values. Refer to Table 399: Output control bits for complementary tim_ocx and tim_ocxn channels with break feature for more details.
When exiting from reset, the break circuit is disabled and the MOE bit is low. The break functions can be enabled by setting the BKE and BK2E bits in the TIMx_BDTR register. The break input polarities can be selected by configuring the BKP and BK2P bits in the same register. BKEx and BKPx can be modified at the same time. When the BKEx and BKPx bits are written, a delay of one APB clock cycle is applied before the writing is effective. Consequently, it is necessary to wait one APB clock period to correctly read back the bit after the write operation.
Because MOE falling edge can be asynchronous, a resynchronization circuit has been inserted between the actual signal (acting on the outputs) and the synchronous control bit (accessed in the TIMx_BDTR register). It results in some delays between the asynchronous
and the synchronous signals. In particular, if MOE is set to 1 whereas it was low, a delay must be inserted (dummy instruction) before reading it correctly. This is because the write acts on the asynchronous signal whereas the read reflects the synchronous signal.
The sources for break (tim_brk) channel are:
- • External sources connected to one of the TIMx_BKIN pin (as per selection done in the GPIO alternate function selection registers), with polarity selection and optional digital filtering
- • Internal sources:
- – coming from a tim_brk_cmpx input (refer to Section 37.3.2: TIM1/TIM8 pins and internal signals for product specific implementation)
- – coming from a system break request (refer to Section 37.3.2: TIM1/TIM8 pins and internal signals for product specific implementation)
The sources for break2 (tim_brk2) are:
- • External sources connected to one of the TIMx_BKIN2 pin (as per selection done in the GPIO alternate function selection registers), with polarity selection and optional digital filtering
- • Internal sources coming from a tim_brk2_cmpx input (refer to Section 37.3.2: TIM1/TIM8 pins and internal signals for product specific implementation)
Break events can also be generated by software using BG and B2G bits in the TIMx_EGR register.
All sources are ORed before entering the timer tim_brk or tim_brk2 inputs, as per Figure 404 below.
Figure 404. Break and Break2 circuitry overview
![Figure 404. Break and Break2 circuitry overview. This block diagram illustrates the internal logic for generating break signals in advanced-control timers. The top section shows the 'tim_sys_brk' signal generation, which is an OR of several AND gates. Each AND gate takes an 'Enable' input (tim_sys_brk0 through tim_sys_brkx) and a 'CSS' (Complementary Output State) input. The output of this OR gate is 'tim_sys_brk', which is connected to the 'SBIF' flag. The middle section shows the 'tim_brk' signal generation. It starts with 'BKINP' (Break Input Pin) and 'TIMx_BKIN from AF controller' inputs. These are processed through a series of AND gates (BKINE, BKCMP1E, BKCMP4E, BKCMP5E, BKCMP8E) that also take inputs from 'tim_brk_cmp[4:1]' and 'tim_brk_cmp[8:5]'. The output of these AND gates is combined with 'BKF[3:0]' (Break Filter) and 'BKP' (Break Pin) inputs through a 'Filter' block and an OR gate. The output of this OR gate is 'tim_brk', which is connected to the 'BIF' flag. The bottom section shows the 'tim_brk2' signal generation, which follows a similar structure to the 'tim_brk' section but uses 'BK2INP', 'TIMx_BKIN2 from AF controller', and 'tim_brk2_cmp' inputs. The output is 'tim_brk2', which is connected to the 'B2IF' flag. The diagram also includes 'Software break requests: BG' and 'BKE' (Break Enable) inputs for the 'tim_brk' signal, and 'Software break requests: B2G' and 'BK2E' (Break2 Enable) inputs for the 'tim_brk2' signal. The identifier 'MSV62336V2' is present in the bottom right corner.](/RM0487-STM32U3/f2893ef1ae47c892a49956e170ecb2f9_img.jpg)
Note: An asynchronous (clockless) operation is only guaranteed when the programmable filter is disabled. If it is enabled, a fail safe clock mode (for example by using the internal PLL and/or the CSS) must be used to guarantee that break events are handled.
When one of the breaks occurs (selected level on one of the break inputs):
- • The MOE bit is cleared asynchronously, putting the outputs in inactive state, idle state, or even releasing the control to the GPIO controller (selected by the OSSI bit). This feature is enabled even if the MCU oscillator is off.
- • Each output channel is driven with the level programmed in the OISx bit in the TIMx_CR2 register as soon as MOE = 0. If OSSI = 0, the timer releases the output control (taken over by the GPIO controller), otherwise the enable output remains high.
- • When complementary outputs are used:
- – The outputs are first put in inactive state (depending on the polarity). This is done asynchronously so that it works even if no clock is provided to the timer.
- – If the timer clock is still present, then the dead-time generator is reactivated in order to drive the outputs with the level programmed in the OISx and OISxN bits after a dead-time. Even in this case, tim_ocx and tim_ocxn cannot be driven to
their active level together. Note that because of the resynchronization on MOE, the dead-time duration is slightly longer than usual (around 2
tim_ker_ck
clock cycles).
- – If
OSSI = 0, the timer releases the output control (taken over by the GPIO controller which forces a Hi-Z state), otherwise the enable outputs remain or become high as soon as one of theCCxEorCCxNEbits is high. - • The break status flag (
SBIF,BIF, andB2IFbits in theTIMx_SRregister) is set. An interrupt is generated if theBIEbit in theTIMx_DIERregister is set. A DMA request can be sent if theBDEbit in theTIMx_DIERregister is set. - • If the
AOEbit in theTIMx_BDTRregister is set, theMOEbit is automatically set again at the next update event (UEV). As an example, this can be used to perform a regulation. Otherwise,MOEremains low until the application sets it to 1 again. In this case, it can be used for security and the break input can be connected to an alarm from power drivers, thermal sensors, or any security components.
Note: If the MOE is reset by the CPU while the AOE bit is set, the outputs are in idle state and forced to inactive level or Hi-Z depending on OSSI value. If both the MOE and AOE bits are reset by the CPU, the outputs are in disabled state and driven with the level programmed in the OISx bit in the TIMx_CR2 register.
The break inputs are active on level. Thus, the MOE cannot be set while the break input is active (neither automatically nor by software). In the meantime, the status flag BIF and B2IF cannot be cleared.
In addition to the break input and the output management, a write protection has been implemented inside the break circuit to safeguard the application. It is used to freeze the configuration of several parameters (dead-time duration,
tim_ocx/tim_ocxn
polarities and state when disabled,
OCxM
configurations, break enable, and polarity). The application can choose from three levels of protection selected by the
LOCK
bits in the
TIMx_BDTR
register. Refer to
Section 37.6.20
. The
LOCK
bits can be written only once after an MCU reset.
Figure 405 shows an example of behavior of the outputs in response to a break.
Figure 405. Various output behavior in response to a break event on tim_brk (OSSI = 1)

The diagram shows the response of timer outputs to a break event (MOE) when OSSI = 1. The break event is indicated by a vertical dashed line labeled 'BREAK (MOE ↓)'. The outputs shown are tim_ocxref, tim_ocx, and tim_ocxn. The behavior of tim_ocx and tim_ocxn depends on the configuration of CCxE, CCxP, OISx, CCxNE, and CCxNP. The 'delay' periods indicate the time between the break event and the output state change.
| Output | Configuration | Behavior after BREAK (MOE ↓) |
|---|---|---|
| tim_ocxref | - | Remains high |
| tim_ocx | (tim_ocxn not implemented, CCxP=0, OISx=1) | Remains high |
| tim_ocx | (tim_ocxn not implemented, CCxP=0, OISx=0) | Remains high |
| tim_ocx | (tim_ocxn not implemented, CCxP=1, OISx=1) | Remains high |
| tim_ocx | (tim_ocxn not implemented, CCxP=1, OISx=0) | Remains high |
| tim_ocx | (CCxE=1, CCxP=0, OISx=0, CCxNE=1, CCxNP=0, OISxN=1) | Remains high |
| tim_ocxn | Low after delay | |
| tim_ocx | (CCxE=1, CCxP=0, OISx=1, CCxNE=1, CCxNP=1, OISxN=1) | Remains high |
| tim_ocxn | Low after delay | |
| tim_ocx | (CCxE=1, CCxP=0, OISx=0, CCxNE=0, CCxNP=0, OISxN=1) | Remains high |
| tim_ocxn | Low after delay | |
| tim_ocx | (CCxE=1, CCxP=0, OISx=1, CCxNE=0, CCxNP=0, OISxN=0) | Remains high |
| tim_ocxn | Low after delay | |
| tim_ocx | (CCxE=1, CCxP=0, CCxNE=0, CCxNP=0, OISx=OISxN=0 or OISx=OISxN=1) | Remains high |
| tim_ocxn | Remains high |
MSv62337V1
The two break inputs have different behaviors on timer outputs:
- • The tim_brk input can either disable (inactive state) or force the PWM outputs to a predefined safe state.
- • tim_brk2 can only disable (inactive state) the PWM outputs.
The tim_brk has a higher priority than tim_brk2 input, as described in Table 392 .
Note: tim_brk2 must only be used with OSSR = OSSI = 1.
Table 392. Behavior of timer outputs versus tim_brk/tim_brk2 inputs
| tim_brk | tim_brk2 | Timer outputs state | Typical use case | |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| tim_ocxn output (low side switches) | tim_ocx output (high side switches) | |||
| Active | X |
| ON after deadtime insertion | OFF |
| Inactive | Active | Inactive | OFF | OFF |
Figure 406 gives an example of tim_ocx and tim_ocxn output behavior in case of active signals on tim_brk and tim_brk2 inputs. In this case, both outputs have active high polarities (CCxP = CCxNP = 0 in TIMx_CCER register).
Figure 406. PWM output state following tim_brk and tim_brk2 assertion (OSSI = 1)

The timing diagram illustrates the behavior of PWM outputs (tim_ocx and tim_ocxn) following the assertion of break inputs (tim_brk and tim_brk2). The diagram is divided into three main I/O states: Active, Inactive, and Idle.
- Active State: Both tim_brk and tim_brk2 are inactive. The outputs tim_ocx and tim_ocxn are active PWM signals.
- Assertion: When tim_brk2 becomes active, followed by tim_brk, the outputs enter the Inactive state.
- Inactive State: Both tim_brk and tim_brk2 are active. The outputs tim_ocx and tim_ocxn are forced inactive. A 'Deadtime' interval is shown between the Active and Inactive states for the outputs.
- Idle State: When both tim_brk and tim_brk2 become inactive again, the outputs return to the Active state. Another 'Deadtime' interval is shown between the Inactive and Active states.

37.3.19 Bidirectional break inputs
The TIM1/TIM8 feature bidirectional break I/Os, as represented on Figure 408 .
This provides support for:
- • A board-level global break signal available for signaling faults to external MCUs or gate drivers, with a unique pin being both an input and an output status pin.
- • Internal break sources and multiple external open drain sources ORed together to trigger a unique break event, when multiple internal and external break sources must be merged.
The tim_brk and tim_brk2 inputs are configured in bidirectional mode using the BKBID and BK2BID bits in the TIMxBDTR register. The BKBID programming bits can be locked in read-only mode using the LOCK bits in the TIMxBDTR register (in LOCK level 1 or above).
The bidirectional mode is available for both the tim_brk and tim_brk2 inputs, and require the I/O to be configured in open-drain mode with active low polarity (using BKINP , BKP , BK2INP and BK2P bits). Any break request coming either from system (for example CSS ), from on-chip peripherals, or from break inputs forces a low level on the break input to signal the fault event. The bidirectional mode is inhibited if the polarity bits are not correctly set (active high polarity), for safety purposes.
The break software events ( BG and B2G ) also cause the break I/O to be forced to 0 to indicate to the external components that the timer is entered in break state. However, this is valid only if the break is enabled ( BKE or B2KE = 1). When a software break event is generated with BKE or B2KE = 0, the outputs are put in safe state and the break flag is set, but there is no effect on the TIMx_BKIN and TIMx_BKIN2 I/Os.
A safe disarming mechanism prevents the system to be definitively locked-up (a low level on the break input triggers a break which enforces a low level on the same input).
When the BKDSRM ( BK2DSRM ) bit is set to 1, this releases the break output to clear a fault signal and to give the possibility to re-arm the system.
At no point the break protection circuitry can be disabled:
- • The break input path is always active: a break event is active even if the BKDSRM ( BK2DSRM ) bit is set and the open drain control is released. This prevents the PWM output to be restarted as long as the break condition is present.
- • The BKDSRM ( BK2DSRM ) bit cannot disarm the break protection as long as the outputs are enabled ( MOE bit is set) (see Table 393 ).
Table 393. Break protection disarming conditions
| MOE | BKBID (BK2BID) | BKDSRM (BK2DSRM) | Break protection state |
|---|---|---|---|
| 0 | 0 | X | Armed |
| 0 | 1 | 0 | Armed |
| 0 | 1 | 1 | Disarmed |
| 1 | X | X | Armed |
Arming and rearming break circuitry
The break circuitry (in input or bidirectional mode) is armed by default (peripheral reset configuration).
The following procedure must be followed to re-arm the protection after a break (break2) event:
- • The BKDSRM (BK2DSRM) bit must be set to release the output control.
- • The software must wait until the system break condition disappears (if any) and clear the SBIF status flag (or clear it systematically before rearming).
- • The software must poll the BKDSRM (BK2DSRM) bit until it is cleared by hardware (when the application break condition disappears).
From this point, the break circuitry is armed and active, and the MOE bit can be set to re-enable the PWM outputs.
Figure 408. Output redirection (tim_brk2 request not represented)
![Figure 408. Output redirection (tim_brk2 request not represented). This block diagram illustrates the internal logic of the break circuitry. On the left, 'Other break inputs' and a 'Bidirectional Break I/O TIM_BKIN' (with AF input active low and AF output open drain connected to Vss) are inputs to an 'AF controller'. The AF controller outputs 'tim_brk_cmp[8:1]' and 'BKIN inputs from AF controller'. These pass through an OR gate, then a 'Filter' block, then a 'BKP' block, and finally an AND gate. This AND gate also receives 'Application break requests' (from 'Software break requests: BG' and 'BKE'). The output of this AND gate is 'tim_sys_brk', which sets the 'SBIF flag'. Below, 'Bidirectional mode control logic' receives 'System break request' and 'tim_brk request' and is controlled by 'MOE', 'BKBID', and 'BKDSRM' bits. Its output goes to another AND gate along with 'tim_sys_brk'. The output of this second AND gate is 'tim_brk', which sets the 'BIF flag' and the 'BRK request'.](/RM0487-STM32U3/dcb276e2a5b920280c9b486ae1c79eb6_img.jpg)
37.3.20 Clearing the tim_ocxref signal on an external event
The
tim_ocxref
signal of a given channel can be cleared when a high level is applied on the
tim_ocref_clr_int
input (OCxCE enable bit in the corresponding
TIMx_CCMRx
register set to 1).
tim_ocxref
remains low until the next transition to the active state, on the following PWM
cycle. This function can only be used in Output compare and PWM modes. It does not work in Forced mode.
tim_ocref_clr_int
input can be selected between the
tim_ocref_clr
input and
tim_etrf
(
tim_etr_in
after the filter) by configuring the
OCCS
bit in the
TIMx_SMCR
register.
The
tim_ocref_clr
input can be selected among several inputs, using the
OCRSEL[2:0]
bitfield in the
TIMx_AF2
register, as shown on the
Figure 409
below. Refer to
Section 37.3.2: TIM1/TIM8 pins and internal signals
for a list of sources available in the product.
Figure 409.
tim_ocref_clr
input selection multiplexer
![Figure 409: tim_ocref_clr input selection multiplexer diagram. The diagram shows two multiplexers. The first multiplexer has eight inputs labeled tim_ocref_clr0 through tim_ocref_clr7. Its output is labeled tim_ocref_clr. This output and another input labeled tim_etrf are connected to a second multiplexer. The second multiplexer's output is labeled tim_ocref_clr_int. The first multiplexer is controlled by the OCRSEL[2:0] bitfield in the TIMx_AF2 register. The second multiplexer is controlled by the OCCS bit in the TIMx_SMCR register. A small code MSV62341V2 is visible in the bottom right corner of the diagram box.](/RM0487-STM32U3/92f15057b1ec5bd05e61bf52ec94e555_img.jpg)
When
tim_etrf
is chosen,
tim_etr_in
must be configured as follows:
- 1. The external trigger prescaler must be kept off: bits
ETPS[1:0]of theTIMx_SMCRregister set to 00. - 2. The external clock mode 2 must be disabled: bit
ECEof theTIMx_SMCRregister set to 0. - 3. The external trigger polarity (
ETP) and the external trigger filter (ETF) can be configured according to application needs (as per polarity of the source connected to the trigger and eventual need to remove noise using the filter).
Figure 410
shows the behavior of the
tim_ocxref
signal when the
tim_etrf
input becomes high, for both values of the enable bit
OCxCE
. In this example, the timer
TIMx
is programmed in PWM mode.
Figure 410. Clearing TIMx tim_ocxref

The figure is a timing diagram with four horizontal signal lines. The top line, labeled 'Counter (CNT) (CCRx)', shows a sawtooth waveform representing the counter value. The second line, labeled 'tim_etrfr', shows a rectangular pulse that goes high when the counter overflows. The third line, labeled 'tim_ocxref (OCxCE = '0')', shows a rectangular pulse that is high when the counter value is less than the CCRx value. The bottom line, labeled 'tim_ocxref (OCxCE = '1')', shows a rectangular pulse that is initially high. It goes low when the counter value reaches the CCRx value. Two arrows point to the falling edges of this signal, labeled 'tim_ocref_clr_int becomes high' and 'tim_ocref_clr_int still high', indicating that the signal is cleared by a hardware interrupt. The diagram is labeled 'MSV62342V1' in the bottom right corner.
Note: In case of a PWM with a 100% duty cycle (if CCRx>ARR), then tim_ocxref is enabled again at the next counter overflow.
37.3.21 6-step PWM generation
When complementary outputs are used on a channel, preload bits are available on the OCxM, CCxE, and CCxNE bits. The preload bits are transferred to the shadow bits at the COM commutation event. Thus one can program in advance the configuration for the next step and change the configuration of all the channels at the same time. COM can be generated by software by setting the COM bit in the TIMx_EGR register or by hardware (on tim_trgi rising edge).
A flag is set when the COM event occurs (COMIF bit in the TIMx_SR register), which can generate an interrupt (if the COMIE bit is set in the TIMx_DIER register) or a DMA request (if the COMDE bit is set in the TIMx_DIER register).
Figure 411 describes the behavior of the tim_ocx and tim_ocxn outputs when a COM event occurs, in three different examples of programmed configurations.
Figure 411. 6-step generation, COM example (OSSR = 1)

The diagram shows the timing relationship between the counter and output signals under different configurations. The Counter (CNT) follows a sawtooth pattern with compare levels (CCRx). A COM event pulse triggers updates to the output control registers.
- Example 1: Initial state: CCxE = 1, CCxNE = 0, OCxM = 0010 (forced inactive). A write to OCxM to 0100 occurs. After the COM event, the state becomes CCxE = 1, CCxNE = 0, OCxM = 0100.
- Example 2: Initial state: CCxE = 1, CCxNE = 0, OCxM = 0100 (forced inactive). A write to CCxNE to 1 and OCxM to 0101 occurs. After the COM event, the state becomes CCxE = 0, CCxNE = 1, OCxM = 0101.
- Example 3: Initial state: CCxE = 1, CCxNE = 0, OCxM = 0010 (forced inactive). A write to CCxNE to 0 and OCxM to 0100 occurs. After the COM event, the state becomes CCxE = 1, CCxNE = 1, OCxM = 0100.
MSv62343V1
37.3.22 One-pulse mode
One-pulse mode (OPM) is a particular case of the previous modes. It allows the counter to be started in response to a stimulus and to generate a pulse with a programmable length after a programmable delay.
Starting the counter can be controlled through the slave mode controller. Generating the waveform can be done in output compare mode or PWM mode. One-pulse mode is selected by setting the OPM bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. This makes the counter stop automatically at the next update event UEV.
A pulse can be correctly generated only if the compare value is different from the counter initial value. Before starting (when the timer is waiting for the trigger), the configuration must be:
- • In upcounting: \( CNT < CCRx \leq ARR \) (in particular, \( 0 < CCRx \) )
- • In downcounting: \( CNT > CCRx \)
Figure 412. Example of one pulse mode.

In the following example, the user wants to generate a positive pulse on
tim_oc1
with a length of
\(
t_{PULSE}
\)
and after a delay of
\(
t_{DELAY}
\)
as soon as a positive edge is detected on the
tim_ti2
input pin.
Use
tim_ti2fp2
as trigger 1:
- • Map
tim_ti2fp2totim_ti2by writingCC2S = 01in theTIMx_CCMR1register. - •
tim_ti2fp2must detect a rising edge, writeCC2P = 0andCC2NP = 0in theTIMx_CCERregister. - • Configure
tim_ti2fp2as trigger for the slave mode controller (tim_trgi) by writingTS = 00110in theTIMx_SMCRregister. - •
tim_ti2fp2is used to start the counter by writingSMSto110in theTIMx_SMCRregister (trigger mode).
The OPM waveform is defined by writing the compare registers (taking into account the clock frequency and the counter prescaler).
- • The
\(
t_{DELAY}
\)
is defined by the value written in the
TIMx_CCR1register. - • The \( t_{PULSE} \) is defined by the difference between the autoreload value and the compare value ( \( TIMx_ARR - TIMx_CCR1 \) ).
- • Suppose the user wants to build a waveform with a transition from 0 to 1 when a compare match occurs and a transition from 1 to 0 when the counter reaches the auto-reload value. This is achieved by enabling PWM mode 2 (
OC1M = 111inTIMx_CCMR1). Optionally the preload registers can be enabled by writingOC1PE = 1in theTIMx_CCMR1register andARPEin theTIMx_CR1register. In this case one has to write the compare value in theTIMx_CCR1register, the autoreload value in theTIMx_ARRregister, generate an update by setting theUGbit and wait for external trigger event ontim_ti2.CC1Pis written to 0 in this example.
In this example, the
DIR
and
CMS
bits in the
TIMx_CR1
register must be low.
Since only one pulse (Single mode) is needed, a 1 must be written in the
OPM
bit in the
TIMx_CR1
register to stop the counter at the next update event (when the counter rolls over
from the autoreload value back to 0). When OPM bit in the TIMx_CR1 register is set to 0, so the Repetitive mode is selected.
Particular case: tim_ocx fast enable:
In One-pulse mode, the edge detection on tim_tix input set the CEN bit which enables the counter. Then the comparison between the counter and the compare value makes the output toggle. But several clock cycles are needed for these operations and it limits the minimum delay \( t_{\text{DELAY min}} \) that can be achieved.
To output a waveform with the minimum delay, the OCxFE bit can be set in the TIMx_CCMRx register. Then tim_ocxref (and tim_ocx) are forced in response to the stimulus, without taking in account the comparison. Its new level is the same as if a compare match had occurred. OCxFE acts only if the channel is configured in PWM1 or PWM2 mode.
37.3.23 Retriggerable One-pulse mode
This mode allows the counter to be started in response to a stimulus and to generate a pulse with a programmable length, but with the following differences with nonretriggerable one-pulse mode described in Section 37.3.22 :
- • The pulse starts as soon as the trigger occurs (no programmable delay).
- • The pulse is extended if a new trigger occurs before the previous one is completed.
The timer must be in Slave mode, with the bits SMS[3:0] = 1000 (Combined Reset + trigger mode) in the TIMx_SMCR register, and the OCxM[3:0] bits set to 1000 or 1001 for retriggerable OPM mode 1 or 2.
If the timer is configured in Up-counting mode, the corresponding CCRx must be set to 0 (the ARR register sets the pulse length). If the timer is configured in Down-counting mode, CCRx must be above or equal to ARR.
Note: The OCxM[3:0] and SMS[3:0] bitfields are split into two parts for compatibility reasons, the most significant bit are not contiguous with the three least significant ones.
This mode must not be used with center-aligned PWM modes. It is mandatory to have CMS[1:0] = 00 in TIMx_CR1.
Figure 413. Retriggerable one-pulse mode

37.3.24 Pulse on compare mode
A pulse can be generated upon compare match event. A signal with a programmable pulsewidth generated when the counter value equals a given compare value, for debugging or synchronization purposes.
This mode is available for any slave mode selection, including encoder modes, in edge and center aligned counting modes. It is solely available for channel 3 and channel 4. The pulse generator is unique and is shared by the two channels, as shown on Figure 414 .
Figure 414. Pulse generator circuitry

The diagram illustrates the pulse generator circuitry for channels 3 and 4. On the left, two 'CCR match' inputs (CCR3 match and CCR4 match) are connected to 'Enable' blocks. These blocks are controlled by configuration values OC3M = 1010 and OC4M = 1010. The outputs of these 'Enable' blocks are connected to an OR gate. The output of the OR gate is connected to a 'Pulse generator' block. The 'Pulse generator' block also receives inputs from a 'PWPRSC [2:0]' register and a 'PW[7:0]' register. The output of the 'Pulse generator' is connected to a 'Reset' input of an R/S flip-flop and a 'Set' input of another R/S flip-flop. The 'Set' input of the top R/S flip-flop is connected to the output of the OR gate. The 'Reset' input of the top R/S flip-flop is connected to the output of the 'Pulse generator' through an inverter. The output of the top R/S flip-flop is connected to an AND gate, which produces the 'tim_oc3' output. The 'Set' input of the bottom R/S flip-flop is connected to the output of the OR gate. The 'Reset' input of the bottom R/S flip-flop is connected to the output of the 'Pulse generator'. The output of the bottom R/S flip-flop is connected to an AND gate, which produces the 'tim_oc4' output. The diagram is labeled MSv62346V1.
Figure 415 shows how the pulse is generated for edge-aligned and encoder operating modes.
Figure 415. Pulse generation on compare event, for edge-aligned and encoder modes

This output compare mode is selected using the OC3M[3:0] and OC4M[3:0] bitfields in TIMx_CCMR2 register.
The pulsewidth is programmed using the PW[7:0] bitfield in the register, using a specific clock prescaled according to PWPRSC[2:0] bits, as follows:
gives the resolution and maximum values depending on the prescaler value.
The pulse is retriggerable: a new trigger while the pulse is ongoing, causes the pulse to be extended.
Note: If the two channels are enabled simultaneously, the pulses are issued independently as long as the trigger on one channel is not overlapping the pulse generated on the concurrent output. On the opposite, if the two triggers are overlapping, the pulse width related to the first arriving trigger is extended (because of the retrigger), while the pulse width of the last arriving trigger is correct (as shown on Figure 416).
Figure 416. Extended pulsewidth in case of concurrent triggers

37.3.25 Encoder interface mode
Quadrature encoder
To select Encoder Interface mode write SMS = 0001 in the TIMx_SMCR register if the counter is counting on tim_ti1 edges only, SMS = 0010 if it is counting on tim_ti2 edges only and SMS = 0011 if it is counting on both tim_ti1 and tim_ti2 edges.
Select the tim_ti1 and tim_ti2 polarity by programming the CC1P and CC2P bits in the TIMx_CCER register. When needed, the input filter can be programmed as well. CC1NP and CC2NP must be kept low.
The two inputs tim_ti1 and tim_ti2 are used to interface to an quadrature encoder. Refer to Table 394 . The counter is clocked by each valid transition on tim_ti1fp1 or tim_ti2fp2 (tim_ti1 and tim_ti2 after input filter and polarity selection, tim_ti1fp1 = tim_ti1 if not filtered and not inverted, tim_ti2fp2 = tim_ti2 if not filtered and not inverted) assuming that it is enabled (CEN bit in TIMx_CR1 register written to 1). The sequence of transitions of the two inputs is evaluated and generates count pulses as well as the direction signal. Depending on the sequence the counter counts up or down, the DIR bit in the TIMx_CR1 register is modified by hardware accordingly. The DIR bit is calculated at each transition on any input (tim_ti1 or tim_ti2), whatever the counter is counting on tim_ti1 only, tim_ti2 only or both tim_ti1 and tim_ti2.
Encoder interface mode acts simply as an external clock with direction selection. This means that the counter just counts continuously between 0 and the autoreload value in the TIMx_ARR register (0 to ARR or ARR down to 0 depending on the direction). So the TIMx_ARR must be configured before starting. In the same way, the capture, compare, prescaler, repetition counter, trigger output features continue to work as normal. Encoder mode and External clock mode 2 are not compatible and must not be selected together.
In this mode, the counter is modified automatically following the speed and the direction of the quadrature encoder and its content, therefore, always represents the encoder's position. The count direction correspond to the rotation direction of the connected sensor. The table summarizes the possible combinations, assuming tim_ti1 and tim_ti2 do not switch at the same time.
Table 394. Counting direction versus encoder signals (CC1P = CC2P = 0)| Active edge | SMS[3:0] | Level on opposite signal (tim_ti1fp1 for tim_ti2, tim_ti2fp2 for tim_ti1) | tim_ti1fp1 signal | tim_ti2fp2 signal | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Rising | Falling | Rising | Falling | |||
| Counting on tim_ti1 only x1 mode | 1110 | High | Down | Up | No count | No count |
| Low | No count | No count | No count | No count | ||
| Counting on tim_ti2 only x1 mode | 1111 | High | No count | No count | Up | Down |
| Low | No count | No count | No count | No count | ||
| Counting on tim_ti1 only x2 mode | 0001 | High | Down | Up | No count | No count |
| Low | Up | Down | No count | No count | ||
| Counting on tim_ti2 only x2 mode | 0010 | High | No count | No count | Up | Down |
| Low | No count | No count | Down | Up | ||
| Counting on tim_ti1 and tim_ti2 x4 mode | 0011 | High | Down | Up | Up | Down |
| Low | Up | Down | Down | Up | ||
A quadrature encoder can be connected directly to the MCU without external interface logic. However, comparators are normally used to convert the encoder's differential outputs to digital signals. This greatly increases noise immunity. The third encoder output which indicate the mechanical zero position, may be connected to the external trigger input and trigger a counter reset.
Figure 417 gives an example of counter operation, showing count signal generation and direction control. It also shows how input jitter is compensated where both edges are selected. This might occur if the sensor is positioned near to one of the switching points. For this example the configuration is the following:
- • CC1S = 01 (TIMx_CCMR1 register, tim_ti1fp1 mapped on tim_ti1).
- • CC2S = 01 (TIMx_CCMR1 register, tim_ti2fp2 mapped on tim_ti2).
- • CC1P = 0 and CC1NP = 0 (TIMx_CCER register, tim_ti1fp1 noninverted, tim_ti1fp1 = tim_ti1).
- • CC2P = 0 and CC2NP = 0 (TIMx_CCER register, tim_ti2fp2 noninverted, tim_ti2fp2 = tim_ti2).
- • SMS = 0011 (TIMx_SMCR register, both inputs are active on both rising and falling edges).
- • CEN = 1 (TIMx_CR1 register, Counter enabled).
Figure 417. Example of counter operation in encoder interface mode.

Figure 418 gives an example of counter behavior when tim_ti1fp1 polarity is inverted (same configuration as above except CC1P = 1).
Figure 418. Example of encoder interface mode with tim_ti1fp1 polarity inverted.

Figure 419 shows the timer counter value during a speed reversal, for various counting modes.
Figure 419. Quadrature encoder counting modes

The figure shows the relationship between two quadrature encoder signals, tim_ti1 and tim_ti2, and the resulting counter values. The DIR bit indicates the direction of rotation. The counter values are shown for three different modes: Counter x4, Counter x2, and Counter x1. The sequences of values are: Counter x4 (6, 7, 8, 9, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2), Counter x2 (8, 9, 0, 1, 2, 1, 0, 9, 8, 7, 6), and Counter x1 (9, 0, 1, 0, 9, 8). The diagram is labeled MSV62351V1.
The timer, when configured in Encoder Interface mode provides information on the sensor's current position. Dynamic information can be obtained (speed, acceleration, deceleration) by measuring the period between two encoder events using a second timer configured in capture mode. The output of the encoder which indicates the mechanical zero can be used for this purpose. Depending on the time between two events, the counter can also be read at regular times. This can be done by latching the counter value into a third input capture register if available (then the capture signal must be periodic and can be generated by another timer). When available, it is also possible to read its value through a DMA request.
The IUFREMAP bit in the TIMx_CR1 register forces a continuous copy of the update interrupt flag (UIF) into the timer counter register's bit 31 (TIMxCNT[31]). This allows both the counter value and a potential roll-over condition signaled by the UIFCPY flag to be read in an atomic way. It eases the calculation of angular speed by avoiding race conditions caused, for instance, by a processing shared between a background task (counter reading) and an interrupt (update interrupt).
There is no latency between the UIF and UIFCPY flag assertions.
In 32-bit timer implementations, when the IUFREMAP bit is set, bit 31 of the counter is overwritten by the UIFCPY flag upon read access (the counter's most significant bit is only accessible in write mode).
Clock plus direction encoder mode
In addition to the quadrature encoder mode, the timer offers support for other types of encoders.
In the clock plus direction mode shown on Figure 420, the clock is provided on a single line, on tim_ti2, while the direction is forced using the tim_ti1 input.
This mode is enabled with the SMS[3:0] bitfield in the TIMx_SMCR register, as following:
- • 1010: x2 mode, the counter is updated on both rising and falling edges of the clock
- • 1011: x1 mode, the counter is updated on a single clock edge, as per CC2P bit value: CC2P = 0 corresponds to rising edge sensitivity and CC2P = 1 corresponds to falling edge sensitivity
The polarity of the direction signal on tim_ti1 is set with the CC1P bit: 0 corresponds to positive polarity (up-counting when tim_ti1 is high and down-counting when tim_ti1 is low) and CC1P = 1 corresponds to negative polarity (up-counting when tim_ti1 is low).
Figure 420. Direction plus clock encoder mode

Directional clock encoder mode
In the directional clock mode on Figure 421 , the clocks are provided on two lines, with a single one at once, depending on the direction, so as to have one up-counting clock line and one down-counting clock line.
This mode is enabled with the SMS[3:0] bitfield in the TIMx_SMCR register, as following:
- • 1100: x2 mode, the counter is updated on both rising and falling edges of any of the two clock line. The CC1P and CC2P bits are coding for the clock idle state. CCxP = 0 corresponds to high-level idle state (refer to Figure 421 ) and CCxP = 1 corresponds to low-level idle state (refer to Figure 422 ).
- • 1101: x1 mode, the counter is updated on a single clock edge, as per CC1P and CC2P bit value. CCxP = 0 corresponds to falling edge sensitivity and high-level idle state (refer to Figure 421 ), CCxP = 1 corresponds to rising edge sensitivity and low-level idle state (refer to Figure 422 ).
Figure 421. Directional clock encoder mode (CC1P = CC2P = 0)

Figure 422. Directional clock encoder mode (CC1P = CC2P = 1)

Table 395 here-below details how the directional clock mode operates, for any input transition.
Table 395. Counting direction versus encoder signals and polarity settings
| Directional clock mode | SMS[3:0] | Level on opposite signal (tim_ti1fp1 for tim_ti2, tim_ti2fp2 for tim_ti1) | tim_ti1fp1 signal | tim_ti2fp2 signal | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Rising | Falling | Rising | Falling | |||
| x2 mode CCxP = 0 | 1100 | High | Down | Down | Up | Up |
| Low | No count | No count | No count | No count | ||
| x2 mode CCxP = 1 | 1100 | High | No count | No count | No count | No count |
| Low | Down | Down | Up | Up | ||
| x1 mode CCxP = 0 | 1101 | High | No count | Down | No count | Up |
| Low | No count | No count | No count | No count | ||
| x1 mode CCxP = 1 | 1101 | High | No count | No count | No count | No count |
| Low | Down | No count | Up | No count | ||
Index input
The counter can be reset by an index signal coming from the encoder, indicating an absolute reference position. The index signal must be connected to the tim_etr_in input. It can be filtered using the digital input filter.
The index functionality is enabled with the IE bit in the TIMX_ECR register. The IE bit must be set only in encoder mode, when the SMS[3:0] bitfield has the following values: 0001, 0010, 011, 1010, 1011, 1100, 1101, 1110, 1111.
Available encoders are proposed with several options for index pulse conditioning, as per Figure 423 :
- • gated with A and B: the pulselength is 1/4 of one channel period, aligned with both A and B edges
- • gated with A (or gated with B): the pulselength is 1/2 of one channel period, aligned with the two edges on channel A (resp. channel B)
- • ungated: the pulselength is up to one channel period, without any alignment to the edges
Figure 423. Index gating options

Timing diagram illustrating the index gating options. The diagram shows five waveforms: Channel A, Channel B, Gated A & B, Gated A, and Ungated. Channel A and B are square waves. Gated A & B is a pulse that is high only when both A and B are high. Gated A is a pulse that is high only when A is high and B is rising. Ungated is a pulse that is high whenever A or B is high. Vertical dashed lines indicate timing relationships between the signals. The diagram is labeled MSv45765V1.
The circuitry tolerates jitter on index signal, whatever the gating mode, as shown on Figure 424 .
In ungated mode, the signal must be strictly below two encoder periods. If the pulselength is greater or equal to two encoder periods, the counter is reset multiple times.
Figure 424. Jittered Index signals

Timing diagram illustrating jittered index signals. The diagram shows five waveforms: Channel A, Channel B, Gated A & B, Gated A, and Ungated. Channel A and B are square waves. Gated A & B, Gated A, and Ungated are pulses with jittered edges. A horizontal double-headed arrow labeled "Max pulselength ungated mode" indicates the maximum allowed pulse width for the ungated signal, which is one channel period. The diagram is labeled MSv45766V1.
The timer supports the three gating options identically, without any specific programming needed. It is only necessary to define on which encoder state (for example channel A and
channel B state combination) the index must be synchronized, using the IPOS[1:0] bitfield in the TIMx_ECR register.
The index detection event acts differently depending on counting direction to ensure symmetrical operation during speed reversal:
- • The counter is reset during up-counting (DIR bit = 0).
- • The counter is set to TIMx_ARR when down counting.
This allows the index to be generated on the very same mechanical angular position whatever the counting direction. Figure 425 shows at which position is the index generated, for a simplistic example (an encoder providing four edges par mechanical rotation).
Figure 425. Index generation for IPOS[1:0] = 11

The diagram shows a circular flow of four states: State 1 (AB = 00) at 0°, State 2 (AB = 01) at 90°, State 3 (AB = 11) at 180°, and State 4 (AB = 10) at 270°. Arrows indicate up-counting (1→2→3→4→1) and down-counting (1→4→3→2→1). A note with an arrow pointing to the transition from State 4 to State 1 states: "The index event is always generated here". The diagram is labeled MSv45767V1.
Figure 426 presents waveforms and corresponding values for IPOS[1:0] = 11. It shows that the instant at which the counter value is forced is automatically adjusted depending on the counting direction:
- • Counter set to 0 when encoder state is 11 (ChA = 1, ChB = 1), when up-counting (DIR bit = 0).
- • Counter set to TIMx_ARR when exiting the 11 state, when down-counting (DIR bit = 1).
An interrupt can be issued upon index detection event.
The arrows are indicating on which transition is the index event interrupt generated.
Figure 426. Counter reading with index gated on channel A (IPOS[1:0] = 11)

The timing diagram shows five waveforms over time: Channel A, Channel B, Index, DIR bit, and Counter. The Counter waveform shows values: 5, 6, 7, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Arrows point from the Index pulse to the counter value 0 (up-counting) and from the Index pulse to the counter value 7 (down-counting). The diagram is labeled MSv45768V1.
Figure 427. presents waveforms and corresponding values for the ungated mode. The arrows are indicating on which transition is the index event generated.

Figure 427. Counter reading with index ungated (IPOS[1:0] = 00)
This timing diagram illustrates the ungated mode of an encoder interface. It shows five waveforms over time:
- Channel A: A square wave representing one encoder output.
- Channel B: A square wave representing the second encoder output, phase-shifted from Channel A.
- Index: A pulse signal. In this ungated mode, the index event is triggered by a transition on Channel B.
- DIR bit: A signal indicating the direction of rotation. It is low (0) for clockwise and high (1) for counter-clockwise.
- Counter: A sequence of numbers representing the current count. In the clockwise direction (DIR=0), the sequence is 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. In the counter-clockwise direction (DIR=1), the sequence is 3, 2, 1, 0, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0, 7.
- When rotating clockwise (DIR=0), the index event occurs on the rising edge of Channel B as it coincides with the counter rolling over from 7 to 0.
- When rotating counter-clockwise (DIR=1), the index event occurs on the falling edge of Channel B as it coincides with the counter rolling over from 0 to 7.
Figure 428. shows how the 'gated on A & B' mode is handled, for various pulse alignment scenario. The arrows are indicating on which transition is the index event generated.

Figure 428. Counter reading with index gated on channel A and B
This timing diagram illustrates the 'gated on A & B' mode. The waveforms are similar to Figure 427, but the 'Index' pulse is only generated when both Channel A and Channel B are high at the time of the counter rollover.
- When rotating clockwise (DIR=0), the index event occurs on the rising edge of Channel B, but only if Channel A is currently high.
- When rotating counter-clockwise (DIR=1), the index event occurs on the falling edge of Channel B, but only if Channel A is currently high.
Figure 429 and Figure 430 detail the case where the subsequent index pulse may be narrower than one quarter of the encoder clock period.
Figure 429. Encoder mode behavior in case of narrow index pulse (IPOS[1:0] = 11)

The figure consists of two timing diagrams illustrating encoder mode behavior when a narrow index pulse is present (IPOS[1:0] = 11). Both diagrams show five signals over time: Channel A, Channel B, Index, DIR bit, and Counter.
Top Diagram: Index leading state transition
- Channel A: A square wave representing one encoder channel.
- Channel B: A square wave representing the other encoder channel, phase-shifted from Channel A.
- Index: A narrow pulse that goes high briefly and then low.
- DIR bit: A signal that indicates the direction of rotation, which is high in this case.
- Counter: A sequence of hexagonal shapes containing the values 5, 6, 7, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. The counter is shown incrementing (5 to 6 to 7) and then decrementing (7 to 6 to 5 to 4 to 3 to 2 to 1) after the index pulse.
An arrow points from the rising edge of the Index pulse to the counter value '0' (after '7'). Another arrow points from the falling edge of the Index pulse to the counter value '7' (before '6'). A shaded oval highlights the first transition (Index rising, Counter 7 to 0).
Bottom Diagram: Index delayed versus state transition
- Signals: Similar to the top diagram, but the Index pulse is delayed relative to the state transitions of Channel A and B.
- Counter: The same sequence of values as the top diagram.
An arrow points from the rising edge of the delayed Index pulse to the counter value '0'. Another arrow points from the falling edge of the Index pulse to the counter value '7'. A shaded oval highlights the first transition (Index rising, Counter 7 to 0).
MSv45771V1
Figure 430. Counter reset Narrow index pulse (closer view, ARR = 0x07)

The figure illustrates the behavior of a timer counter resetting upon detecting a narrow index pulse. Two distinct timing sequences are provided:
- Top Sequence: The counter increments through values 5, 6, and 7. Upon the rising edge of the Index pulse, the Counter resets to 0 and continues counting 1, 2, 3.
- Bottom Sequence: The counter increments through values 4, 5, and 6. Upon the rising edge of the Index pulse, the Counter resets to 0 and continues counting 1, 2, 3.
In both cases, Channel A and Channel B provide the quadrature signals, and the DIR bit remains at a constant level (low). Vertical dashed lines align the signal transitions with the counter states. An arrow indicates the causal link between the Index pulse and the Counter reset to 0.
MSv45772V1
Figure 431 shows how the index is managed in x1 and x2 modes.
Figure 431. Index behavior in x1 and x2 mode (IPOS[1:0] = 01)

AB = IPOS[1:0] = 01
Channel A
Channel B
Index
DIR bit
Counter x2: 10, 11, 0, 1, 2, 1, 0, 11, 10, 9, 8
Counter x1: 5, 6, 7, 0, 1, 3
MSv45773V1
Directional index sensitivity
The IDIR[1:0] bitfield in the TIMx_ECR register allows the index to be active only in a selected counting direction.
Figure 432 shows the relationship between index and counter reset events, depending on IDIR[1:0] value.
Figure 432. Directional index sensitivity
![Timing diagram showing DIR bit, Counter, Index input, and Counter reset signals for IDIR[1:0] values 00, 01, and 10. The diagram is split into UP-counting and Down-counting sections. Counter is a sawtooth wave. Index input is a pulse. Counter reset signals show pulses corresponding to index inputs during the specified counting direction.](/RM0487-STM32U3/429866fd48a2d1d16bf7a8937594aeb8_img.jpg)
DIR bit: UP-counting, Down-counting
Counter
Index input
Counter reset
IDIR[1:0]=00
IDIR[1:0]=01
IDIR[1:0]=10
MSv45774V1
Special first index event management
The FIDX bit in the TIMx_ECR register allows the index to be taken only once, as shown on Figure 433 . Once the first index has arrived, any subsequent index is ignored. If needed, the circuitry can be rearmed by writing the FIDX bit to 0 and setting it again to 1.
Figure 433. Counter reset as function of FIDX bit setting

Timing diagram illustrating the counter reset behavior based on the FIDX bit setting. The diagram shows four waveforms over time:
- Counter: A sawtooth waveform representing the counter value. It increases linearly and resets to zero upon a valid index event.
- Index input: A series of pulses. The first pulse occurs while FIDX = 0. Subsequent pulses occur while FIDX = 1.
- Counter reset (FIDX = 0): The reset signal is active (low) when FIDX is 0. It is triggered by the first index input pulse and remains active until the counter reaches zero.
- Counter reset (FIDX = 1): The reset signal is inactive (high) when FIDX is 1. It is only triggered by the first index input pulse after FIDX has been set to 1. Subsequent index input pulses are ignored.
MSv45775V1
Index blanking
The index event can be blanked using the tim_ti3 or tim_ti4 inputs. During the blanking window, the index events are no longer resetting the counter, as shown on the Figure 434 below.
This mode is enabled using the IBLK[1:0] bitfield in the TIMx_ECR register, as following:
- • IBLK[1:0] = 00: Index signal always active
- • IBLK[1:0] = 01: Index signal blanking on tim_ti3 input
- • IBLK[1:0] = 10: Index signal blanking on tim_ti4 input
Figure 434. Index blanking
![Timing diagram for Figure 434 showing index blanking behavior with IBLK[1:0] settings.](/RM0487-STM32U3/f2684dd9ff81dc2538f3dc12d6a4e6a0_img.jpg)
Timing diagram illustrating the index blanking behavior based on the IBLK[1:0] bitfield setting. The diagram shows five waveforms over time:
- Counter: A sawtooth waveform representing the counter value. It increases linearly and resets to zero upon a valid index event.
- Index input: A series of pulses. The first pulse occurs while IBLK[1:0] = 00. Subsequent pulses occur while IBLK[1:0] = 01, some of which are during the blanking window.
- Blanking signal TI3 (CC3P=0): A signal that goes high during the blanking window, coinciding with the active IBLK[1:0] = 01 state.
- Counter reset (IBLK[1:0] = 00): The reset signal is active (low) when IBLK[1:0] is 00. It is triggered by the first index input pulse and remains active until the counter reaches zero.
- Counter reset (IBLK[1:0] = 01): The reset signal is inactive (high) when IBLK[1:0] is 01. It is only triggered by the first index input pulse after IBLK[1:0] has been set to 01 and outside the blanking window. Subsequent index input pulses during the blanking window are ignored.
MSv45776V1
Index management in nonquadrature mode
Figure 435 and Figure 436 detail how the index is managed in directional clock mode and clock plus direction mode, when the SMS[3:0] bitfield is equal to 1010, 1011, 1100, 1101.
For both of these modes, the index sensitivity is set with the IPOS[0] bit as following:
- • IPOS[0] = 0: Index is detected on clock low level
- • IPOS[0] = 1: Index is detected on clock high level
The IPOS[1] bit is not-significant.
Figure 435. Index behavior in clock + direction mode, IPOS[0] = 1
![Timing diagram for Figure 435 showing tim_ti1, tim_ti2, Index, Counter x2 mode, and Counter x1 mode signals over time. The diagram illustrates the index pulse generation and counter behavior in clock + direction mode with IPOS[0] = 1.](/RM0487-STM32U3/2ebdc00cbe5574e7bc84023295899da8_img.jpg)
This timing diagram shows the relationship between several signals over time. The top signal, tim_ti1 , is a digital signal that is initially high and then transitions to low. Below it, tim_ti2 is a square wave representing a quadrature signal. The Index signal is a pulse that goes high when tim_ti1 is high and tim_ti2 has a specific transition. Below the Index signal, two counter value sequences are shown: Counter x2 mode (7, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 3, 2, 7, 6, 5) and Counter x1 mode (7, 0, 1, 2, 1, 7). Arrows indicate the timing of counter increments and decrements relative to the tim_ti2 signal and the Index pulse. The diagram is labeled MSv62355V1.
Figure 436. Index behavior in directional clock mode, IPOS[0] = 1
![Timing diagram for Figure 436 showing tim_ti1, tim_ti2, DIR bit, Counter x2 mode, and Counter x1 mode signals over time. The diagram illustrates the index pulse generation and counter behavior in directional clock mode with IPOS[0] = 1.](/RM0487-STM32U3/67df7a89a5e0f1619ea96dd70ac685ba_img.jpg)
This timing diagram shows the relationship between several signals over time. The top signal, tim_ti1 , is a digital signal that is initially high and then transitions to low. Below it, tim_ti2 is a square wave representing a quadrature signal. The DIR bit is a signal that is initially low and then transitions to high. The Index signal is a pulse that goes high when tim_ti1 is high and tim_ti2 has a specific transition. Below the Index signal, two counter value sequences are shown: Counter x2 mode (9, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0, 9, 8) and Counter x1 mode (9, 0, 1, 2, 1, 0, 9). Arrows indicate the timing of counter increments and decrements relative to the tim_ti2 signal and the Index pulse. The diagram is labeled MSv62356V1.
Encoder error management
For encoder configurations where two quadrature signals are available, it is possible to detect transition errors. The reading on the two inputs corresponds to a 2-bit gray code which can be represented as a state diagram, on Figure 437. A single bit is expected to change at once. An erroneous transition sets the TERRF interrupt flag in the TIMx_SR
status register. A transition error interrupt is generated if the TERRIE bit is set in the TIMx_DIER register.
Figure 437. State diagram for quadrature encoded signals

The diagram illustrates the state transitions for quadrature encoded signals. It features four circular nodes arranged in a square, labeled 00 (top-left), 01 (top-right), 10 (bottom-left), and 11 (bottom-right). Solid double-headed arrows represent correct transitions between adjacent states: 00 to 01, 01 to 11, 11 to 10, and 10 to 00. Dashed double-headed arrows represent erroneous transitions between diagonal states: 00 to 11 and 10 to 01. A legend at the bottom left shows a solid arrow for 'Correct transitions' and a dashed arrow for 'Erroneous transitions'. The identifier MSV45779V1 is located in the bottom right corner of the diagram area.
For encoder having an index signal, it is possible to detect abnormal operation resulting in an excess of pulses per revolution. An encoder with N pulses per revolution provides \( 4 \times N \) counts per revolution. The index signal resets the counter every \( 4 \times N \) clock periods.
If the counter value is incremented from TIMx_ARR to 0 or decremented from 0 to TIMx_ARR value without any index event, this is reported as an index position error.
The overflow threshold is programmed using the TIMx_ARR register. A 1000 lines encoder results in a counter value being between 0 and 3999 (in 4x reading mode). The overflow detection threshold must be programmed by setting \( \text{TIMx\_ARR} = 3999 + 1 = 4000 \) .
The error assertion is delayed to the transition 0 to 1 when in up-counting. This is cope with narrow index pulses in gated A and B mode, as shown on Figure 438 .
Figure 438. Up-counting encoder error detection

The figure illustrates the timing for up-counting encoder error detection. It is divided into two horizontal sections.
Top Section:
- tim_ti1: A digital signal that is high during the counting sequence.
- tim_ti2: A digital signal that is low during the counting sequence.
- Index: A narrow pulse that goes high just before the counter wraps from 7 to 0.
- IERRF: An interrupt error flag that remains low throughout this section.
- Counter: Shows values 5, 6, 7, 0, 1, 2, 3. An arrow labeled "Error detected" points to the transition from 7 to 0. Another arrow labeled "Abort (index detection)" points to the transition from 0 to 1.
Bottom Section:
- tim_ti1: Same as above.
- tim_ti2: Same as above.
- Index: A narrow pulse that goes high between the counter values 0 and 1.
- IERRF: Goes high at the transition from 0 to 1 and stays high.
- Counter: Shows values 5, 6, 7, 0, 1, 2, 3. An arrow labeled "Error detected" points to the transition from 0 to 1. Another arrow labeled "Error asserted" points to the transition from 1 to 2.
MSV62357V1
In down-counting mode, the detection is conditioned by a preliminary transition from 1 to 0. This is to cope with narrow index pulses in gated A and B mode, as shown on Figure 439 , to avoid any false error detection in case the encoder dithers between TIMx_ARR and 0 immediately after the index detection.
Figure 439. Down-counting encode error detection

The figure illustrates two timing scenarios for down-counting encode error detection. Both scenarios show the relationship between
tim_ti1
,
tim_ti2
,
Index
,
IERRF
, and the
Counter
.
Top Scenario (No error):
tim_ti1is high.tim_ti2is high.Indexis high.Countervalues: 2, 1, 0, 7, 0, 7, 6, 5.- An arrow points to the transition from 0 to 7 following an index pulse. Text: "No error: transition from 0 to TIMx_ARR following an index".
Bottom Scenario (Error detected):
tim_ti1is high.tim_ti2is high.Indexis high.IERRFis high (asserted).Countervalues: 2, 1, 0, 7, 6, 5, 4.- An arrow points to the transition from 0 to 7. Text: "Error detected".
- Another arrow points to the assertion of the
IERRFflag. Text: "Error asserted". - Text above the counter: "No error: transition from 0 to TIMx_ARR without index, but not following a transition from 1 to 0".
MSV62358V1
An index error sets the IERRF interrupt flag in the TIMx_SR status register. An index error interrupt is generated if the IERRIE bit is set in the TIMx_DIER register.
Functional encoder interrupts
The following interrupts are also available in encoder mode
- • Direction change: any change of the counting direction in encoder mode causes the DIR bit in the TIMx_CR1 register to toggle. The direction change sets the DIRF interrupt flag in the TIMx_SR status register. A direction change interrupt is generated if the DIRIE bit is set in the TIMx_DIER register.
- • Index event: the index event sets the IDXF interrupt flag in the TIMx_SR status register. An index interrupt is generated if the IDXIE bit is set in the TIMx_DIER register.
Slave mode selection preload for run-time encoder mode update
It may be necessary to switch from one encoder mode to another during run-time. This is typically done at high-speed to decrease the update interrupt rate, by switching from x4 to x2 mode, as shown on Figure 440 .
For this purpose, the SMS[3:0] bit can be preloaded. This is enabled by setting the SMSPE enable bit in the TIMx_SMCR register. The trigger for the transfer from SMS[3:0] preload to active value can be selected with the SMSPS bit in the TIMx_SMCR register.
- • SMSPS = 0: the transfer is triggered by the update event (UEV) occurring when the counter overflows when upcounting, and underflows when downcounting.
- • SMSPS = 1: the transfer is triggered by the index event.
Figure 440. Encoder mode change with preload transferred on update (SMSPS = 0)
![Timing diagram showing encoder mode change from x4 to x2 to x1 mode. The diagram illustrates the relationship between the encoder clock output, update events, preload values, and active values for the SMS[3:0] bits. The x4 mode has the highest frequency, followed by x2, then x1. Update events occur at the transition points between modes. Preload values are set for each mode: SMS = 0011 for x4, SMS = 0001 for x2, and SMS = 1110 for x1. The active value is updated to match the preload value at each mode transition.](/RM0487-STM32U3/0f3f8b5ad0ae19cfb6681a0e6520df3a_img.jpg)
The figure is a timing diagram illustrating an encoder mode change. The top waveform shows the encoder clock output, which is a square wave. The frequency of this wave decreases from left to right, corresponding to the modes x4, x2, and x1. Below the waveform, the 'Update event' line shows pulses that coincide with the transitions between modes. The 'Preload value' row shows the SMS[3:0] bits being preloaded for each mode: SMS = 0011 for x4, SMS = 0001 for x2, and SMS = 1110 for x1. The 'Active value' row shows the current SMS[3:0] bits, which update to match the preload values at each mode transition. The diagram is labeled MSv45781V1 in the bottom right corner.
Encoder clock output
The encoder mode operating principle is not perfectly suited for high-resolution velocity measurements, at low speed, as it requires a relatively long integration time to have a sufficient number of clock edges and a precise measurement.
At low speed, a better solution is to do an edge-to-edge clock period measurement. This can be achieved using a slave timer. The timer can output the encoder clock information on the tim_trgo output. The slave timer can then perform a period measurement and provide velocity information for each and every encoder clock edge.
This mode is enabled by setting the MMS[3:0] bitfield to 1000, in the TIMx_CR2 register. It is valid for the following SMS[3:0] values: 0001, 0010, 0011, 1010, 1011, 1100, 1101, 1110, 1111. Any other SMS[3:0] code is not allowed and may lead to unexpected behavior.
37.3.26 Direction bit output
It is possible to output a direction signal out of the timer, on the tim_oc3n and tim_oc4 output signals (copy of the DIR bit in the TIMx_CR1 register). This is achieved by setting the OC3M[3:0] or the OC4M[3:0] bitfield to 1011 in the TIMx_CCMR2 register.
This feature can be used for monitoring the counting direction (or rotation direction) in encoder mode, or to have a signal indicating the up/down phases in center-aligned PWM mode.
37.3.27 UIF bit remapping
The IUFREMAP bit in the TIMx_CR1 register forces a continuous copy of the update interrupt flag UIF into the timer counter register's bit 31 (TIMxCNT[31]). This allows both the counter value and a potential roll-over condition signaled by the UIFCPY flag to be read in an atomic way. In particular cases, it can ease the calculations by avoiding race conditions, caused for instance by a processing shared between a background task (counter reading) and an interrupt (update interrupt).
There is no latency between the UIF and UIFCPY flags assertion.
37.3.28 Timer input XOR function
The TI1S bit in the TIMx_CR2 register, allows the input filter of channel 1 to be connected to the output of an XOR gate, combining the three input pins tim_ti1, tim_ti2 and tim_ti3.
The XOR output can be used with all the timer input functions such as trigger or input capture. It is convenient to measure the interval between edges on two input signals, as per Figure 441 .
Figure 441. Measuring time interval between edges on three signals

The figure is a timing diagram showing five waveforms over time. From top to bottom, they are:
- tim_ti1 : A digital signal that starts high, goes low at the first vertical dashed line, and returns high at the second.
- tim_ti2 : A digital signal that starts low, goes high at the second vertical dashed line, and returns low at the third.
- tim_ti3 : A digital signal that starts high, goes low at the third vertical dashed line, and returns high at the fourth.
- XOR : The output of an XOR gate combining the three inputs. It shows pulses that correspond to the transitions of the individual inputs.
- TIMx Counter : A sawtooth waveform representing the counter's value. Each rising edge of the XOR signal triggers a reset of the counter to zero, and it then counts up until the next trigger.
37.3.29 Interfacing with Hall sensors
This is done using the advanced-control timers to generate PWM signals to drive the motor and another timer TIMx referred to as “interfacing timer” in Figure 442 . The “interfacing timer” captures the three timer input pins (tim_ti1, tim_ti2 and tim_ti3) connected through a XOR to the tim_ti1 input channel (selected by setting the TI1S bit in the TIMx_CR2 register).
The slave mode controller is configured in reset mode; the slave input is tim_ti1f_ed. Thus, each time one of the three inputs toggles, the counter restarts counting from 0. This creates a time base triggered by any change on the Hall inputs.
On the “interfacing timer”, capture/compare channel 1 is configured in capture mode, capture signal is tim_trc (See Figure 384 ). The captured value, which corresponds to the time elapsed between two changes on the inputs, gives information about motor speed.
The “interfacing timer” can be used in output mode to generate a pulse which changes the configuration of the channels of the advanced-control timer (by triggering a COM event). The advanced-control timer is used to generate PWM signals to drive the motor. To do this, the interfacing timer channel must be programmed so that a positive pulse is generated after a programmed delay (in output compare or PWM mode). This pulse is sent to the advanced-control timer through the tim_trgo output.
In this example the user wants to change the PWM configuration of the advanced-control timer after a programmed delay each time a change occurs on the Hall inputs connected to one of the TIMx timers.
- • Configure three timer inputs ORed to the tim_ti1 input channel by writing the TI1S bit in the TIMx_CR2 register to 1.
- • Program the time base: write the TIMx_ARR to the max value (the counter must be cleared by the tim_ti1 change). Set the prescaler to get a maximum counter period longer than the time between two changes on the sensors.
- • Program the channel 1 in capture mode (tim_trc selected): write the CC1S bits in the TIMx_CCMR1 register to 01. The digital filter can also be programmed if needed.
- • Program the channel 2 in PWM 2 mode with the desired delay: write the OC2M bits to 111 and the CC2S bits to 00 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register.
- • Select tim_oc2ref as trigger output on tim_trgo: write the MMS bits in the TIMx_CR2 register to 101.
In the advanced-control timer, the right tim_itrx input must be selected as trigger input, the timer is programmed to generate PWM signals, the capture/compare control signals are preloaded (CCPC = 1 in the TIMx_CR2 register) and the COM event is controlled by the trigger input (CCUS = 1 in the TIMx_CR2 register). The PWM control bits (CCxE, OCxM) are written after a COM event for the next step (this can be done in an interrupt subroutine generated by the rising edge of tim_oc2ref).
Figure 442 describes this example.
Figure 442. Example of Hall sensor interface

The timing diagram illustrates the operation of a Hall sensor interface using advanced-control timers. The top three signals, tim_ti1, tim_ti2, and tim_ti3, represent Hall sensor inputs. Below them, the 'Interfacing timer' section shows the Counter (CNT) as a sawtooth waveform that increments and resets. CCR2 is shown as a reference level. CCR1 contains a series of values: C7A3, C7A8, C794, C7A5, C7AB, and C796. The trigger output tim_trgo = tim_oc2ref is a square wave. A dashed line separates the interfacing timer from the 'Advanced-control timers' section. The COM signal is a narrow pulse. tim_oc1 and tim_oc3 show PWM signals, while tim_oc1n, tim_oc2n, and tim_oc3n show their respective inverted signals. Arrows at the bottom point to specific events labeled 'Write CCxE, CCxNE and OCxM for next step'. The diagram is identified by the code MSv62360V1.
37.3.30 Timer synchronization
The TIMx timers are linked together internally for timer synchronization or chaining. Refer to Section 38.4.23: Timer synchronization for details. They can be synchronized in several modes: Reset mode, Gated mode, Trigger mode, Reset + trigger, and gated + reset modes.
Slave mode: Reset mode
The counter and its prescaler can be reinitialized in response to an event on a trigger input. Moreover, if the URS bit from the TIMx_CR1 register is low, an update event UEV is generated. Then all the preloaded registers (TIMx_ARR, TIMx_CCRx) are updated.
In the following example, the upcounter is cleared in response to a rising edge on tim_ti1 input:
- • Configure the channel 1 to detect rising edges on tim_ti1. Configure the input filter duration (in this example, we do not need any filter, so we keep IC1F = 0000). The capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so it does not need to be configured. The CC1S bits select the input capture source only, CC1S = 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. Write CC1P = 0 and CC1NP = 0 in TIMx_CCER register to validate the polarity (and detect rising edges only).
- • Configure the timer in reset mode by writing SMS = 100 in TIMx_SMCR register. Select tim_ti1 as the input source by writing TS = 00101 in TIMx_SMCR register.
- • Start the counter by writing CEN = 1 in the TIMx_CR1 register.
The counter starts counting on the internal clock, then behaves normally until tim_ti1 rising edge. When tim_ti1 rises, the counter is cleared and restarts from 0. In the meantime, the trigger flag is set (TIF bit in the TIMx_SR register) and an interrupt request, or a DMA request can be sent if enabled (depending on the TIE and TDE bits in TIMx_DIER register).
The following figure shows this behavior when the autoreload register TIMx_ARR = 0x36. The delay between the rising edge on tim_ti1 and the actual reset of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on tim_ti1 input.
Figure 443. Control circuit in reset mode

Slave mode: Gated mode
The counter can be enabled depending on the level of a selected input.
In the following example, the upcounter counts only when tim_ti1 input is low:
- • Configure the channel 1 to detect low levels on tim_ti1. Configure the input filter duration (in this example, we do not need any filter, so we keep IC1F = 0000). The capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so it does not need to be configured. The CC1S bits select the input capture source only, CC1S = 01 in TIMx_CCMR1 register. Write CC1P = 1 and CC1NP = 0 in TIMx_CCER register to validate the polarity (and detect low level only).
- • Configure the timer in gated mode by writing SMS = 101 in TIMx_SMCR register. Select tim_ti1 as the input source by writing TS = 00101 in TIMx_SMCR register.
- • Enable the counter by writing CEN = 1 in the TIMx_CR1 register (in gated mode, the counter does not start if CEN = 0, whatever is the trigger input level).
The counter starts counting on the internal clock as long as
tim_ti1
is low and stops as soon as
tim_ti1
becomes high. The TIF flag in the
TIMx_SR
register is set both when the counter starts or stops.
The delay between the rising edge on
tim_ti1
and the actual stop of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on
tim_ti1
input.
Figure 444. Control circuit in Gated mode

The timing diagram illustrates the control circuit in Gated mode. The signals shown are:
tim_ti1: A signal that goes high and then low. The counter stops when this signal goes high.Counter enable: A signal that is high whentim_ti1is low, enabling the counter.tim_cnt_ck, tim_psc_ck: Periodic clock signals used for counting.Counter register: Shows the count values: 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38. The count increases while the counter is enabled.TIF: A flag that is set when the counter starts or stops. Arrows indicate that writingTIF = 0clears the flag.
MSV62362V1
Slave mode: Trigger mode
The counter can start in response to an event on a selected input.
In the following example, the upcounter starts in response to a rising edge on
tim_ti2
input:
- Configure the channel 2 to detect rising edges on
tim_ti2. Configure the input filter duration (in this example, we do not need any filter, so we keepIC2F = 0000). The capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so it does not need to be configured. TheCC2Sbits are configured to select the input capture source only,CC2S = 01inTIMx_CCMR1register. WriteCC2P = 1andCC2NP = 0inTIMx_CCERregister to validate the polarity (and detect low level only). - Configure the timer in trigger mode by writing
SMS = 110inTIMx_SMCRregister. Selecttim_ti2as the input source by writingTS = 00110inTIMx_SMCRregister.
When a rising edge occurs on
tim_ti2
, the counter starts counting on the internal clock and the TIF flag is set.
The delay between the rising edge on
tim_ti2
and the actual start of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on
tim_ti2
input.
Figure 445. Control circuit in trigger mode

tim_ti2
Counter enable
tim_cnt_ck, tim_psc_ck
Counter register
34
35
36
37
38
TIF
MSv62363V1
Slave mode: Combined reset + trigger mode
In this case, a rising edge of the selected trigger input (tim_trgi) reinitializes the counter, generates an update of the registers, and starts the counter.
This mode is used for One-pulse mode.
Slave mode: Combined gated + reset mode
The counter clock is enabled when the trigger input (tim_trgi) is high. The counter stops and is reset) as soon as the trigger becomes low. Both start and stop of the counter are controlled.
This mode is used to detect out-of-range PWM signal (duty cycle exceeding a maximum expected value).
Slave mode: external clock mode 2 + trigger mode
The external clock mode 2 can be used in addition to another slave mode (except external clock mode 1 and encoder mode). In this case, the tim_etr_in signal is used as external clock input, and another input can be selected as trigger input (in reset mode, gated mode or trigger mode). It is recommended not to select tim_etr_in as tim_trgi through the TS bits of TIMx_SMCR register.
In the following example, the upcounter is incremented at each rising edge of the
tim_etr_in
signal as soon as a rising edge of
tim_ti1
occurs:
- 1. Configure the external trigger input circuit by programming the
TIMx_SMCRregister as follows:- –
ETF = 0000: no filter - –
ETPS = 00: prescaler disabled - –
ETP = 0: detection of rising edges ontim_etr_inandECE = 1to enable the external clock mode 2.
- –
- 2. Configure the channel 1 as follows, to detect rising edges on TI:
- –
IC1F = 0000: no filter. - – The capture prescaler is not used for triggering and does not need to be configured.
- –
CC1S = 01inTIMx_CCMR1register to select only the input capture source - –
CC1P = 0andCC1NP = 0inTIMx_CCERregister to validate the polarity (and detect rising edge only).
- –
- 3. Configure the timer in trigger mode by writing
SMS = 110inTIMx_SMCRregister. Selecttim_ti1as the input source by writingTS = 00101inTIMx_SMCRregister.
A rising edge on
tim_ti1
enables the counter and sets the TIF flag. The counter then counts on
tim_etr_in
rising edges.
The delay between the rising edge of the
tim_etr_in
signal and the actual reset of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on
tim_etrp
input.
Figure 446. Control circuit in external clock mode 2 + trigger mode

The timing diagram illustrates the operation of the timer in external clock mode 2 with trigger mode. The signals shown are:
- tim_ti1 : A digital signal that goes high at the first vertical dashed line, indicating the start of the sequence.
- Counter enable
: A signal that goes high immediately following the rising edge of
tim_ti1. - ETR : An external trigger signal showing multiple rising edges. The first rising edge occurs after the counter is enabled.
- tim_cnt_ck, tim_psc_ck : The counter clock signal, which is active only when the counter is enabled. It shows a series of pulses starting from the first rising edge of ETR.
- Counter register : Shows the count values 34, 35, and 36. The count increments at each rising edge of the ETR signal while the counter is enabled.
- TIF
: A flag signal that goes high at the rising edge of
tim_ti1and returns to low after a short duration.
The diagram is labeled with MSV62364V1 in the bottom right corner.
Note:
The clock of the slave peripherals (such as timer, ADC) receiving the
tim_trgo
or the
tim_trgo2
signals must be enabled prior to receive events from the master timer, and the clock frequency (prescaler) must not be changed on-the-fly while triggers are received from the master timer.
37.3.31 ADC triggers
The timer can generate an ADC triggering event with various internal signals, such as reset, enable or compare events. It is also possible to generate a pulse issued by internal edge detectors, such as:
- • Rising and falling edges of OC4ref
- • Rising edge on OC5ref or falling edge on OC6ref
The triggers are issued on the
tim_trgo2
internal line which is redirected to the ADC. There is a total of 16 possible events, which can be selected using the
MMS2[3:0]
bits in the
TIMx_CR2
register.
An example of an application for 3-phase motor drives is given in Figure 399 .
Note: The clock of the slave peripherals (timer, ADC, ...) receiving the
tim_trgo
or the
tim_trgo2
signals must be enabled prior to receive events from the master timer, and the clock frequency (prescaler) must not be changed on-the-fly while triggers are received from the master timer.
The clock of the ADC must be enabled prior to receive events from the master timer, and must not be changed on-the-fly while triggers are received from the timer.
37.3.32 ADC synchronization
The timer operation can be synchronized to the ADC clock to trigger jitter-free ADC sampling. This function is enabled using the
ADSYNC
bit in the
TIMx_CR2
register.
This feature is useful when the timers and the ADCs are operating with semisynchronous clocks (clocks derived from a same source with integer ratio
tim_ker_ck/adc_ker_ck
), for instance
adc_ker_ck = 75
MHz and
tim_ker_ck = 150
MHz or 300 MHz.
ADSYNC
must also be set when both peripherals are operating at the same frequency from the same clock source, when jitter-free operation is needed.
ADSYNC
must not be set and jitter-free operation is not supported in the following cases:
- • when the clock ratio is not an integer (for example
adc_ker_ck = 75MHz andtim_ker_ck = 100MHz): in this case, the sampling point jitter due to the timer to ADC signal resynchronization is 1adc_ker_ckperiod maximum - • when the ADC is operating in asynchronous mode (
adc_ker_ckuncorrelated withtim_ker_ck): in this case, the sampling point jitter due to the timer to ADC signal resynchronization is 1adc_ker_ckperiod maximum.
When
ADSYNC = 1
, the timer operation is slightly changed: the counter enable and counter reset events are aligned to the
adc_ker_ck
ADC clock, to avoid any phase shift due to clocks enable in the RCC.
Jitter-free operation is guaranteed only when one of the two requirements below is met (depending on the selected trigger source).
- 1. The counter period must be a multiple of the ADC clock period:
- 2. The compare value must be a multiple of the ADC clock period:
Note: If none of the two above requirements are met, the trigger is still generated, but the latency is not constant and varies with the timer and ADC clocks phase shift.
Programming guidelines
The ADC synchronization feature must not be modified during run-time, once the counter is enabled and once the ADC has been configured for receiving triggers from the timer.
It is mandatory to follow the procedure below to use the ADC synchronization:
- 1. Enable the destination ADC clock.
- 2. Configure the timer and set the ADSYNC bit.
- 3. Configure the ADC and enable it (using ADSTART and/or JADSTART bits).
- 4. Start the timer (with the CEN counter enable bit).
37.3.33 DMA burst mode
The TIMx timers have the capability to generate multiple DMA requests upon a single event. The main purpose is to be able to reprogram part of the timer multiple times without software overhead, but it can also be used to read several registers in a row, at regular intervals.
The DMA controller destination is unique and must point to the virtual register TIMx_DMAR. On a given timer event, the timer launches a sequence of DMA requests (burst). Each write into the TIMx_DMAR register is actually redirected to one of the timer registers.
The DBL[4:0] bits in the TIMx_DCR register set the DMA burst length. The timer recognizes a burst transfer when a read or a write access is done to the TIMx_DMAR address), i.e. the number of transfers (either in half-words or in bytes).
The DBA[4:0] bits in the TIMx_DCR register define the DMA base address for DMA transfers (when read/write access are done through the TIMx_DMAR address). DBA is defined as an offset starting from the address of the TIMx_CR1 register:
Example:
00000: TIMx_CR1
00001: TIMx_CR2
00010: TIMx_SMCR
The DBSS[3:0] bits in the TIMx_DCR register defines the interrupt source that triggers the DMA burst transfers (see Section 37.6.29: TIMx DMA control register (TIMx_DCR)(x = 1, 8) for details).
As an example, the timer DMA burst feature is used to update the contents of the CCRx registers (x = 2, 3, 4) upon an update event, with the DMA transferring half words into the CCRx registers.
This is done in the following steps:
- 1. Configure the corresponding DMA channel as follows:
- – DMA channel peripheral address is the DMAR register address.
- – DMA channel memory address is the address of the buffer in the RAM containing the data to be transferred by DMA into CCRx registers.
- – Number of data to transfer = 3 (see note below).
- – Circular mode disabled.
- 2. Configure the DCR register by configuring the DBA and DBL bitfields as follows: DBL = 3 transfers, DBA = 0xE and DBSS = 1.
- 3. Enable the TIMx update DMA request (set the UDE bit in the DIER register).
- 4. Enable TIMx.
- 5. Enable the DMA channel.
This example is for the case where every CCRx register to be updated once. If every CCRx register is to be updated twice for example, the number of data to transfer must be 6. Let's take the example of a buffer in the RAM containing data1, data2, data3, data4, data5, and data6. The data is transferred to the CCRx registers as follows: on the first update DMA request, data1 is transferred to CCR2, data2 is transferred to CCR3, data3 is transferred to CCR4 and on the second update DMA request, data4 is transferred to CCR2, data5 is transferred to CCR3, and data6 is transferred to CCR4.
Note: A null value can be written to the reserved registers.
37.3.34 TIM1/TIM8 DMA requests
The TIM1/TIM8 can generate a DMA request, as shown in the table below.
Table 396. DMA request
| DMA request signal | DMA request | Enable control bit |
|---|---|---|
| tim_upd_dma | Update | UDE |
| tim_cc1_dma | Capture/compare 1 | CC1DE |
| tim_cc2_dma | Capture/compare 2 | CC2DE |
| tim_cc3_dma | Capture/compare 3 | CC3DE |
| tim_cc4_dma | Capture/compare 4 | CC4DE |
| tim_com_dma | Commutation (COM) | COMDE |
| tim_trgi_dma | Trigger | TDE |
37.3.35 Debug mode
When the microcontroller enters debug mode (Cortex-M33 core halted), the TIMx counter can either continue to work normally or stop, depending on DBG_TIMx_STOP configuration bit in DBG module.
The behavior in debug mode can be programmed with a dedicated configuration bit per timer in the Debug support (DBG) module.
For safety purposes, when the counter is stopped, the outputs are disabled (as if the MOE bit was reset). The outputs can either be forced to an inactive state (OSSI bit = 1), or have their control taken over by the GPIO controller (OSSI bit = 0), typically to force a Hi-Z.
For more details, refer to section Debug support (DBG).
37.4 TIM1/TIM8 low-power modes
Table 397. Effect of low-power modes on TIM1/TIM8
| Mode | Description |
|---|---|
| Sleep | No effect, peripheral is active. The interrupts can cause the device to exit from Sleep mode. |
| Stop | The timer operation is stopped and the register content is kept. No interrupt can be generated. |
| Standby | The timer is powered-down and must be reinitialized after exiting the Standby mode. |
37.5 TIM1/TIM8 interrupts
The TIM1/TIM8 can generate multiple interrupts, as shown in Table 398 .
Table 398. Interrupt requests
| Interrupt acronym | Interrupt event | Event flag | Enable control bit | Interrupt clear method | Exit from Sleep mode | Exit from Stop and Standby mode | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| TIM_UPD | Update | UIF | UIE | write 0 in UIF | Yes | No | |
| TIM_CC | Capture/compare 1 | CC1IF | CC1IE | write 0 in CC1IF | Yes | No | |
| Capture/compare 2 | CC2IF | CC2IE | write 0 in CC2IF | Yes | No | ||
| Capture/compare 3 | CC3IF | CC3IE | write 0 in CC3IF | Yes | No | ||
| Capture/compare 4 | CC4IF | CC4IE | write 0 in CC4IF | Yes | No | ||
| TIM_TRGI_COM_ DIR_IDX | TIM_COM | Commutation (COM) | COMIF | COMIE | write 0 in COMIF | Yes | No |
| TIM_TRGI | Trigger | TIF | TIE | write 0 in TIF | Yes | No | |
| TIM_IDX | Index | IDXF | IDXIE | write 0 in IDXF | Yes | No | |
| TIM_DIR | Direction | DIRF | DIRIE | write 0 in DIRF | Yes | No | |
| TIM_BRK_TERR_ IERR | TIM_BRK | Break | BIF | BIE | write 0 in BIF | Yes | No |
| Break2 | B2IF | write 0 in B2IF | Yes | No | |||
| System Break | SBIF | write 0 in SBIF | Yes | No | |||
| TIM_IERR | Index Error | IERRF | IERRIE | write 0 in IERRF | Yes | No | |
| TIM_TERR | Transition Error | TERRF | TERRIE | write 0 in TERRF | Yes | No |
37.6 TIM1/TIM8 registers
Refer to Section 1.2 for a list of abbreviations used in register descriptions.
The peripheral registers can be accessed by half-words (16-bit) or words (32-bit).
37.6.1 TIMx control register 1 (TIMx_CR1)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x000
Reset value: 0x0000
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | DITH EN | UIFRE MAP | Res. | CKD[1:0] | ARPE | CMS[1:0] | DIR | OPM | URS | UDIS | CEN | ||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||
Bits 15:13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 12 DITHEN : Dithering enable
0: Dithering disabled
1: Dithering enabled
Note: The DITHEN bit can only be modified when CEN bit is reset.
Bit 11 UIFREMAP : UIF status bit remapping
0: No remapping. UIF status bit is not copied to TIMx_CNT register bit 31.
1: Remapping enabled. UIF status bit is copied to TIMx_CNT register bit 31.
Bit 10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 9:8 CKD[1:0] : Clock division
This bitfield indicates the division ratio between the timer clock (tim_ker_ck) frequency and the dead-time and sampling clock ( \( t_{DTS} \) ) used by the dead-time generators and the digital filters (tim_etr_in, tim_tix),
00: \( t_{DTS} = t_{tim\_ker\_ck} \)
01: \( t_{DTS} = 2 * t_{tim\_ker\_ck} \)
10: \( t_{DTS} = 4 * t_{tim\_ker\_ck} \)
11: Reserved, do not program this value
Bit 7 ARPE : Autoreload preload enable
0: TIMx_ARR register is not buffered
1: TIMx_ARR register is buffered
Bits 6:5 CMS[1:0] : Center-aligned mode selection
00: Edge-aligned mode. The counter counts up or down depending on the direction bit (DIR).
01: Center-aligned mode 1. The counter counts up and down alternatively. Output compare interrupt flags of channels configured in output (CCxS = 00 in TIMx_CCMRx register) are set only when the counter is counting down.
10: Center-aligned mode 2. The counter counts up and down alternatively. Output compare interrupt flags of channels configured in output (CCxS = 00 in TIMx_CCMRx register) are set only when the counter is counting up.
11: Center-aligned mode 3. The counter counts up and down alternatively. Output compare interrupt flags of channels configured in output (CCxS = 00 in TIMx_CCMRx register) are set both when the counter is counting up or down.
Note: It is not allowed to switch from edge-aligned mode to center-aligned mode as long as the counter is enabled (CEN = 1)
Bit 4 DIR : Direction- 0: Counter used as upcounter
- 1: Counter used as downcounter
Note: This bit is read only when the timer is configured in Center-aligned mode or Encoder mode.
Bit 3 OPM : One-pulse mode- 0: Counter is not stopped at update event
- 1: Counter stops counting at the next update event (clearing the bit CEN)
This bit is set and cleared by software to select the UEV event sources.
- 0: Any of the following events generate an update interrupt or DMA request if enabled.
These events can be:
- – Counter overflow/underflow
- – Setting the UG bit
- – Update generation through the slave mode controller
- 1: Only counter overflow/underflow generates an update interrupt or DMA request if enabled.
This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable UEV event generation.
- 0: UEV enabled. The Update (UEV) event is generated by one of the following events:
- – Counter overflow/underflow
- – Setting the UG bit
- – Update generation through the slave mode controller
Buffered registers are then loaded with their preload values.
- 1: UEV disabled. The Update event is not generated, shadow registers keep their value (ARR, PSC, CCRx). However the counter and the prescaler are reinitialized if the UG bit is set or if a hardware reset is received from the slave mode controller.
- 0: Counter disabled
- 1: Counter enabled
Note: External clock, gated mode and encoder mode can work only if the CEN bit has been previously set by software. However trigger mode can set the CEN bit automatically by hardware.
37.6.2 TIMx control register 2 (TIMx_CR2)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x004
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | AD SYNC | Res. | Res. | MMS[3] | Res. | MMS2[3:0] | Res. | OIS6 | Res. | OIS5 | |||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| OIS4N | OIS4 | OIS3N | OIS3 | OIS2N | OIS2 | OIS1N | OIS1 | TI1S | MMS[2:0] | CCDS | CCUS | Res. | CCPC | ||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | |
Bits 31:29 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 28 ADSYNC : ADC synchronization
0: The timer operates independently from the ADC
1: The timer operation is synchronized with the ADC clock to provide jitter-free sampling point. This mode can be enabled only with specific ADC / timer clock relationship. Refer to Section 37.3.32 for requirements.
The ADSYNC must not be modified when the counter is enabled (CEN bit is set).
Bits 27:26 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 23:20 MMS2[3:0] : Master mode selection 2
These bits allow the information to be sent to ADC for synchronization (tim_trgo2) to be selected. The combination is as follows:
0000: Reset - the UG bit from the TIMx_EGR register is used as trigger output (tim_trgo2). If the reset is generated by the trigger input (slave mode controller configured in reset mode), the signal on tim_trgo2 is delayed compared to the actual reset.
0001: Enable - the Counter Enable signal CNT_EN is used as trigger output (tim_trgo2). It is useful to start several timers at the same time or to control a window in which a slave timer is enabled. The Counter Enable signal is generated by a logic AND between the CEN control bit and the trigger input when configured in Gated mode. When the Counter Enable signal is controlled by the trigger input, there is a delay on tim_trgo2, except if the Master/Slave mode is selected (see the MSM bit description in TIMx_SMCR register).
0010: Update - the update event is selected as trigger output (tim_trgo2). For instance, a master timer can then be used as a prescaler for a slave timer.
0011: Compare pulse - the trigger output sends a positive pulse when the CC1IF flag is to be set (even if it was already high), as soon as a capture or compare match occurs (tim_trgo2).
0100: Compare - tim_oc1refc signal is used as trigger output (tim_trgo2)
0101: Compare - tim_oc2refc signal is used as trigger output (tim_trgo2)
0110: Compare - tim_oc3refc signal is used as trigger output (tim_trgo2)
0111: Compare - tim_oc4refc signal is used as trigger output (tim_trgo2)
1000: Compare - tim_oc5refc signal is used as trigger output (tim_trgo2)
1001: Compare - tim_oc6refc signal is used as trigger output (tim_trgo2)
1010: Compare Pulse - tim_oc4refc rising or falling edges generate pulses on tim_trgo2
1011: Compare pulse - tim_oc6refc rising or falling edges generate pulses on tim_trgo2
1100: Compare pulse - tim_oc4refc or tim_oc6refc rising edges generate pulses on tim_trgo2
1101: Compare pulse - tim_oc4refc rising or tim_oc6refc falling edges generate pulses on tim_trgo2
1110: Compare pulse - tim_oc5refc or tim_oc6refc rising edges generate pulses on tim_trgo2
1111: Compare pulse - tim_oc5refc rising or tim_oc6refc falling edges generate pulses on tim_trgo2
Note: The clock of the slave timer or ADC must be enabled prior to receive events from the master timer, and must not be changed on-the-fly while triggers are received from the master timer.
Bit 19 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 18 OIS6 : Output idle state 6 (tim_oc6 output)
Refer to OIS1 bit
Bit 17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 16 OIS5 : Output idle state 5 (tim_oc5 output)
Refer to OIS1 bit
Bit 15 OIS4N : Output idle state 4 (tim_oc4n output)
Refer to OIS1N bit
Bit 14 OIS4 : Output idle state 4 (tim_oc4 output)
Refer to OIS1 bit
Bit 13 OIS3N : Output idle state 3 (tim_oc3n output)
Refer to OIS1N bit
Bit 12 OIS3 : Output idle state 3 (tim_oc3n output)
Refer to OIS1 bit
Bit 11 OIS2N : Output idle state 2 (tim_oc2n output)
Refer to OIS1N bit
Bit 10 OIS2 : Output idle state 2 (tim_oc2 output)
Refer to OIS1 bit
Bit 9 OIS1N : Output idle state 1 (tim_oc1n output)
0: tim_oc1n = 0 after a dead-time when MOE = 0
1: tim_oc1n = 1 after a dead-time when MOE = 0
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1, 2 or 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 8 OIS1 : Output idle state 1 (tim_oc1 output)
0: tim_oc1 = 0 (after a dead-time) when MOE = 0
1: tim_oc1 = 1 (after a dead-time) when MOE = 0
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1, 2 or 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 7 TI1S : tim_ti1 selection
0: The tim_ti1_in[15:0] multiplexer output is connected to tim_ti1 input
1: tim_ti1_in[15:0], tim_ti2_in[15:0] and tim_ti3_in[15:0] multiplexers outputs are XORed and connected to the tim_ti1 input
Bits 25, 6:4 MMS[3:0] : Master mode selectionThese bits select the information to be sent in master mode to slave timers for synchronization (tim_trgo). The combination is as follows:
0000: Reset - the UG bit from the TIMx_EGR register is used as trigger output (tim_trgo). If the reset is generated by the trigger input (slave mode controller configured in reset mode) then the signal on tim_trgo is delayed compared to the actual reset.
0001: Enable - the Counter Enable signal CNT_EN is used as trigger output (tim_trgo). It is useful to start several timers at the same time or to control a window in which a slave timer is enable. The Counter Enable signal is generated by a logic AND between CEN control bit and the trigger input when configured in gated mode. When the Counter Enable signal is controlled by the trigger input, there is a delay on tim_trgo, except if the master/slave mode is selected (see the MSM bit description in TIMx_SMCR register).
0010: Update - The update event is selected as trigger output (tim_trgo). For instance a master timer can then be used as a prescaler for a slave timer.
0011: Compare Pulse - The trigger output send a positive pulse when the CC1IF flag is to be set (even if it was already high), as soon as a capture or a compare match occurred. (tim_trgo).
0100: Compare - tim_oc1refc signal is used as trigger output (tim_trgo)
0101: Compare - tim_oc2refc signal is used as trigger output (tim_trgo)
0110: Compare - tim_oc3refc signal is used as trigger output (tim_trgo)
0111: Compare - tim_oc4refc signal is used as trigger output (tim_trgo)
1000: Encoder Clock output - The encoder clock signal is used as trigger output (tim_trgo). This code is valid for the following SMS[3:0] values: 0001, 0010, 0011, 1010, 1011, 1100, 1101, 1110, 1111. Any other SMS[3:0] code is not allowed and may lead to unexpected behavior.
Other codes reserved
Note: The clock of the slave timer or ADC must be enabled prior to receive events from the master timer, and must not be changed on-the-fly while triggers are received from the master timer.
Bit 3 CCDS : Capture/compare DMA selection0: CCx DMA request sent when CCx event occurs
1: CCx DMA requests sent when update event occurs
Bit 2 CCUS : Capture/compare control update selection0: When capture/compare control bits are preloaded (CCPC = 1), they are updated by setting the COMG bit only
1: When capture/compare control bits are preloaded (CCPC = 1), they are updated by setting the COMG bit or when an rising edge occurs on tim_trgi
Note: This bit acts only on channels that have a complementary output.
Bit 1 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 0 CCPC : Capture/compare preloaded control0: CCxE, CCxNE and OCxM bits are not preloaded
1: CCxE, CCxNE and OCxM bits are preloaded, after having been written, they are updated only when a commutation event (COM) occurs (COMG bit set or rising edge detected on tim_trgi, depending on the CCUS bit).
Note: This bit acts only on channels that have a complementary output.
37.6.3 TIMx slave mode control register (TIMx_SMCR)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x008
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | SMSPS | SMSPE | Res. | Res. | TS[4:3] | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | SMS[3] | |
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 | |
| ETP | ECE | ETPS[1:0] | ETF[3:0] | MSM | TS[2:0] | OCCS | SMS[2:0] | |||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | |||||||||
Bits 31:26 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 25 SMSPS : SMS preload source
This bit selects whether the events that triggers the SMS[3:0] bitfield transfer from preload to active
0: The transfer is triggered by the Timer's Update event
1: The transfer is triggered by the Index event
Bit 24 SMSPE : SMS preload enable
This bit selects whether the SMS[3:0] bitfield is preloaded
0: SMS[3:0] bitfield is not preloaded
1: SMS[3:0] preload is enabled
Bits 23:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 21:20 TS[4:3] : Trigger selection - bit 4:3
Refer to TS[2:0] description - bits 6:4
Bits 19:17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 15 ETP : External trigger polarity
This bit selects whether tim_etr_in or tim_etr_in is used for trigger operations
0: tim_etr_in is non-inverted, active at high level or rising edge.
1: tim_etr_in is inverted, active at low level or falling edge.
Bit 14 ECE : External clock enable
This bit enables External clock mode 2.
0: External clock mode 2 disabled
1: External clock mode 2 enabled. The counter is clocked by any active edge on the tim_etrf signal.
Note: Setting the ECE bit has the same effect as selecting external clock mode 1 with tim_trgi connected to tim_etrf (SMS = 111 and TS = 00111).
It is possible to simultaneously use external clock mode 2 with the following slave modes: reset mode, gated mode and trigger mode. Nevertheless, tim_trgi must not be connected to tim_etrf in this case (TS bits must not be 00111).
If external clock mode 1 and external clock mode 2 are enabled at the same time, the external clock input is tim_etrf.
Bits 13:12 ETPS[1:0] : External trigger prescalerExternal trigger signal tim_etrp frequency must be at most 1/4 of TIMxCLK frequency. A prescaler can be enabled to reduce tim_etrp frequency. It is useful when inputting fast external clocks on tim_etr_in.
00: Prescaler OFF
01: tim_etr_in frequency divided by 2
10: tim_etr_in frequency divided by 4
11: tim_etr_in frequency divided by 8
Bits 11:8 ETF[3:0] : External trigger filterThis bitfield then defines the frequency used to sample tim_etrp signal and the length of the digital filter applied to tim_etrp. The digital filter is made of an event counter in which N consecutive events are needed to validate a transition on the output:
0000: No filter, sampling is done at \( f_{DTS} \)
0001: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{tim\_ker\_ck} \) , N = 2
0010: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{tim\_ker\_ck} \) , N = 4
0011: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{tim\_ker\_ck} \) , N = 8
0100: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/2 \) , N = 6
0101: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/2 \) , N = 8
0110: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/4 \) , N = 6
0111: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/4 \) , N = 8
1000: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/8 \) , N = 6
1001: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/8 \) , N = 8
1010: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/16 \) , N = 5
1011: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/16 \) , N = 6
1100: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/16 \) , N = 8
1101: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/32 \) , N = 5
1110: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/32 \) , N = 6
1111: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/32 \) , N = 8
Bit 7 MSM : Master/slave mode0: No action
1: The effect of an event on the trigger input (tim_trgi) is delayed to allow a perfect synchronization between the current timer and its slaves (through tim_trgo). It is useful if we want to synchronize several timers on a single external event.
Bits 6:4 TS[2:0] : Trigger selectionThis bitfield is combined with TS[4:3] bits.
This bitfield selects the trigger input to be used to synchronize the counter.
00000: Internal Trigger 0 (tim_itr0)
00001: Internal Trigger 1 (tim_itr1)
00010: Internal Trigger 2 (tim_itr2)
00011: Internal Trigger 3 (tim_itr3)
00100: tim_ti1 Edge Detector (tim_ti1f_ed)
00101: Filtered Timer Input 1 (tim_ti1fp1)
00110: Filtered Timer Input 2 (tim_ti2fp2)
00111: External Trigger input (tim_etrf)
01000: Internal Trigger 4 (tim_itr4)
01001: Internal Trigger 5 (tim_itr5)
01010: Internal Trigger 6 (tim_itr6)
01011: Internal Trigger 7 (tim_itr7)
01100: Internal Trigger 8 (tim_itr8)
01101: Internal Trigger 9 (tim_itr9)
01110: Internal Trigger 10 (tim_itr10)
01111: Internal trigger 11 (tim_itr11)
10000: Internal trigger 12 (tim_itr12)
10001: Internal trigger 13 (tim_itr13)
10010: Internal trigger 14 (tim_itr14)
10011: Internal trigger 15 (tim_itr15)
Others: Reserved
See Table 384: Internal trigger connection for more details on tim_itr x meaning for each Timer.
Note: These bits must be changed only when they are not used (for example when SMS = 000) to avoid wrong edge detections at the transition.
Bit 3 OCCS : OREF clear selectionThis bit is used to select the OREF clear source.
0: tim_ocref_clr_int is connected to the tim_ocref_clr input
1: tim_ocref_clr_int is connected to tim_etrf
Bits 16, 2:0 SMS[3:0] : Slave mode selection
When external signals are selected the active edge of the trigger signal (tim_trgi) is linked to the polarity selected on the external input (refer to ETP bit in TIMx_SMCR for tim_etr_in and CCxP/CCxNP bits in TIMx_CCER register for tim_ti1fp1 and tim_ti2fp2).
0000: Slave mode disabled - if CEN = 1 then the prescaler is clocked directly by the internal clock.
0001: Quadrature encoder mode 1, x2 mode- Counter counts up/down on tim_ti1fp1 edge depending on tim_ti2fp2 level.
0010: Quadrature encoder mode 2, x2 mode - Counter counts up/down on tim_ti2fp2 edge depending on tim_ti1fp1 level.
0011: Quadrature encoder mode 3, x4 mode - Counter counts up/down on both tim_ti1fp1 and tim_ti2fp2 edges depending on the level of the other input.
0100: Reset mode - Rising edge of the selected trigger input (tim_trgi) reinitializes the counter and generates an update of the registers.
0101: Gated mode - The counter clock is enabled when the trigger input (tim_trgi) is high. The counter stops (but is not reset) as soon as the trigger becomes low. Both start and stop of the counter are controlled.
0110: Trigger mode - The counter starts at a rising edge of the trigger tim_trgi (but it is not reset). Only the start of the counter is controlled.
0111: External Clock mode 1 - Rising edges of the selected trigger (tim_trgi) clock the counter.
1000: Combined reset + trigger mode - Rising edge of the selected trigger input (tim_trgi) reinitializes the counter, generates an update of the registers and starts the counter.
1001: Combined gated + reset mode - The counter clock is enabled when the trigger input (tim_trgi) is high. The counter stops (and is reset) as soon as the trigger becomes low. Both start and stop of the counter are controlled.
1010: Encoder mode: Clock plus direction, x2 mode.
1011: Encoder mode: Clock plus direction, x1 mode, tim_ti2fp2 edge sensitivity is set by CC2P
1100: Encoder mode: Directional Clock, x2 mode.
1101: Encoder mode: Directional Clock, x1 mode, tim_ti1fp1 and tim_ti2fp2 edge sensitivity is set by CC1P and CC2P.
1110: Quadrature encoder mode: x1 mode, counting on tim_ti1fp1 edges only, edge sensitivity is set by CC1P.
1111: Quadrature encoder mode: x1 mode, counting on tim_ti2fp2 edges only, edge sensitivity is set by CC2P.
Note: The gated mode must not be used if tim_ti1f_ed is selected as the trigger input (TS = 00100). Indeed, tim_ti1f_ed outputs 1 pulse for each transition on TI1F, whereas the gated mode checks the level of the trigger signal.
Note: The clock of the slave peripherals (timer, ADC, ...) receiving the tim_trgo or the tim_trgo2 signals must be enabled prior to receive events from the master timer, and the clock frequency (prescaler) must not be changed on-the-fly while triggers are received from the master timer.
37.6.4 TIMx DMA/interrupt enable register (TIMx_DIER)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x00C
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | TERRIE | IERRIE | DIRIE | IDXIE | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. |
| rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| Res. | TDE | COMDE | CC4DE | CC3DE | CC2DE | CC1DE | UDE | BIE | TIE | COMIE | CC4IE | CC3IE | CC2IE | CC1IE | UIE |
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Bits 31:24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 23 TERRIE : Transition error interrupt enable
0: Transition error interrupt disabled
1: Transition error interrupt enabled
Bit 22 IERRIE : Index error interrupt enable
0: Index error interrupt disabled
1: Index error interrupt enabled
Bit 21 DIRIE : Direction change interrupt enable
0: Direction Change interrupt disabled
1: Direction Change interrupt enabled
Bit 20 IDXIE : Index interrupt enable
0: Index interrupt disabled
1: Index Change interrupt enabled
Bits 19:15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 14 TDE : Trigger DMA request enable
0: Trigger DMA request disabled
1: Trigger DMA request enabled
Bit 13 COMDE : COM DMA request enable
0: COM DMA request disabled
1: COM DMA request enabled
Bit 12 CC4DE : Capture/compare 4 DMA request enable
0: CC4 DMA request disabled
1: CC4 DMA request enabled
Bit 11 CC3DE : Capture/compare 3 DMA request enable
0: CC3 DMA request disabled
1: CC3 DMA request enabled
Bit 10 CC2DE : Capture/compare 2 DMA request enable
0: CC2 DMA request disabled
1: CC2 DMA request enabled
Bit 9 CC1DE : Capture/compare 1 DMA request enable
0: CC1 DMA request disabled
1: CC1 DMA request enabled
- Bit 8
UDE
: Update DMA request enable
- 0: Update DMA request disabled
- 1: Update DMA request enabled
- Bit 7
BIE
: Break interrupt enable
- 0: Break interrupt disabled
- 1: Break interrupt enabled
- Bit 6
TIE
: Trigger interrupt enable
- 0: Trigger interrupt disabled
- 1: Trigger interrupt enabled
- Bit 5
COMIE
: COM interrupt enable
- 0: COM interrupt disabled
- 1: COM interrupt enabled
- Bit 4
CC4IE
: Capture/compare 4 interrupt enable
- 0: CC4 interrupt disabled
- 1: CC4 interrupt enabled
- Bit 3
CC3IE
: Capture/compare 3 interrupt enable
- 0: CC3 interrupt disabled
- 1: CC3 interrupt enabled
- Bit 2
CC2IE
: Capture/compare 2 interrupt enable
- 0: CC2 interrupt disabled
- 1: CC2 interrupt enabled
- Bit 1
CC1IE
: Capture/compare 1 interrupt enable
- 0: CC1 interrupt disabled
- 1: CC1 interrupt enabled
- Bit 0
UIE
: Update interrupt enable
- 0: Update interrupt disabled
- 1: Update interrupt enabled
37.6.5 TIMx status register (TIMx_SR)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x010
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | TERRF | IERRF | DIRF | IDXF | Res. | Res. | CC6IF | CC5IF |
| rc_w0 | rc_w0 | rc_w0 | rc_w0 | rc_w0 | rc_w0 | ||||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| Res. | Res. | SBIF | CC4OF | CC3OF | CC2OF | CC1OF | B2IF | BIF | TIF | COMIF | CC4IF | CC3IF | CC2IF | CC1IF | UIF |
| rc_w0 | rc_w0 | rc_w0 | rc_w0 | rc_w0 | rc_w0 | rc_w0 | rc_w0 | rc_w0 | rc_w0 | rc_w0 | rc_w0 | rc_w0 | rc_w0 |
Bits 31:24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 23 TERRF : Transition error interrupt flag
This flag is set by hardware when a transition error is detected in encoder mode. It is cleared by software by writing it to 0.
0: No encoder transition error has been detected.
1: An encoder transition error has been detected
Bit 22 IERRF : Index error interrupt flag
This flag is set by hardware when an index error is detected. It is cleared by software by writing it to 0.
0: No index error has been detected.
1: An index error has been detected
Bit 21 DIRF : Direction change interrupt flag
This flag is set by hardware when the direction changes in encoder mode (DIR bit value in TIMx_CR is changing). It is cleared by software by writing it to 0.
0: No direction change
1: Direction change
Bit 20 IDXF : Index interrupt flag
This flag is set by hardware when an index event is detected. It is cleared by software by writing it to 0.
0: No index event occurred.
1: An index event has occurred
Bits 19:18 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 17 CC6IF : Compare 6 interrupt flag
Refer to CC1IF description
Note: Channel 6 can only be configured as output.
Bit 16 CC5IF : Compare 5 interrupt flag
Refer to CC1IF description
Note: Channel 5 can only be configured as output.
Bits 15:14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 13 SBIF : System break interrupt flag
This flag is set by hardware as soon as the system break input goes active. It can be cleared by software if the system break input is not active.
This flag must be reset to re-start PWM operation.
0: No break event occurred.
1: An active level has been detected on the system break input. An interrupt is generated if BIE = 1 in the TIMx_DIER register.
Bit 12 CC4OF : Capture/compare 4 overcapture flag
Refer to CC1OF description
Bit 11 CC3OF : Capture/compare 3 overcapture flag
Refer to CC1OF description
Bit 10 CC2OF : Capture/compare 2 overcapture flag
Refer to CC1OF description
Bit 9 CC1OF: Capture/compare 1 overcapture flagThis flag is set by hardware only when the corresponding channel is configured in input capture mode. It is cleared by software by writing it to 0.
0: No overcapture has been detected.
1: The counter value has been captured in TIMx_CCR1 register while CC1IF flag was already set
Bit 8 B2IF: Break 2 interrupt flagThis flag is set by hardware as soon as the break 2 input goes active. It can be cleared by software if the break 2 input is not active.
0: No break event occurred.
1: An active level has been detected on the break 2 input. An interrupt is generated if BIE = 1 in the TIMx_DIER register.
Bit 7 BIF: Break interrupt flagThis flag is set by hardware as soon as the break input goes active. It can be cleared by software if the break input is not active.
0: No break event occurred.
1: An active level has been detected on the break input. An interrupt is generated if BIE = 1 in the TIMx_DIER register.
Bit 6 TIF: Trigger interrupt flagThis flag is set by hardware on the TRG trigger event (active edge detected on tim_trgi input when the slave mode controller is enabled in all modes but gated mode. It is set when the counter starts or stops when gated mode is selected. It is cleared by software.
0: No trigger event occurred.
1: Trigger interrupt pending.
Bit 5 COMIF: COM interrupt flagThis flag is set by hardware on COM event (when capture/compare Control bits - CCxE, CCxNE, OCxM - have been updated). It is cleared by software.
0: No COM event occurred.
1: COM interrupt pending.
Bit 4 CC4IF: Capture/compare 4 interrupt flagRefer to CC1IF description
Bit 3 CC3IF: Capture/compare 3 interrupt flagRefer to CC1IF description
Bit 2 CC2IF : Capture/compare 2 interrupt flag
Refer to CC1IF description
Bit 1 CC1IF : Capture/compare 1 interrupt flag
This flag is set by hardware. It is cleared by software (input capture or output compare mode) or by reading the TIMx_CCR1 register (input capture mode only).
0: No compare match / No input capture occurred
1: A compare match or an input capture occurred
If channel CC1 is configured as output: this flag is set when the content of the counter TIMx_CNT matches the content of the TIMx_CCR1 register. When the content of TIMx_CCR1 is greater than the content of TIMx_ARR, the CC1IF bit goes high on the counter overflow (in up-counting and up/down-counting modes) or underflow (in downcounting mode). There are 3 possible options for flag setting in center-aligned mode, refer to the CMS bits in the TIMx_CR1 register for the full description.
If channel CC1 is configured as input: this bit is set when counter value has been captured in TIMx_CCR1 register (an edge has been detected on IC1, as per the edge sensitivity defined with the CC1P and CC1NP bits setting, in TIMx_CCER).
Bit 0 UIF : Update interrupt flag
This bit is set by hardware on an update event. It is cleared by software.
0: No update occurred.
1: Update interrupt pending. This bit is set by hardware when the registers are updated:
–At overflow or underflow regarding the repetition counter value (update if repetition counter = 0) and if the UDIS = 0 in the TIMx_CR1 register.
–When CNT is reinitialized by software using the UG bit in TIMx_EGR register, if URS = 0 and UDIS = 0 in the TIMx_CR1 register.
–When CNT is reinitialized by a trigger event (refer to Section 37.6.3: TIMx slave mode control register (TIMx_SMCR)(x = 1, 8) ), if URS = 0 and UDIS = 0 in the TIMx_CR1 register.
37.6.6 TIMx event generation register (TIMx_EGR)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x014
Reset value: 0x0000
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | B2G | BG | TG | COMG | CC4G | CC3G | CC2G | CC1G | UG |
| w | w | w | w | w | w | w | w | w |
Bits 15:9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 8 B2G : Break 2 generation
This bit is set by software in order to generate an event, it is automatically cleared by hardware.
0: No action
1: A break 2 event is generated. MOE bit is cleared and B2IF flag is set. Related interrupt can occur if enabled.
Bit 7 BG : Break generation
This bit is set by software in order to generate an event, it is automatically cleared by hardware.
0: No action
1: A break event is generated. MOE bit is cleared and BIF flag is set. Related interrupt or DMA transfer can occur if enabled.
Bit 6 TG : Trigger generationThis bit is set by software in order to generate an event, it is automatically cleared by hardware.
0: No action
1: The TIF flag is set in TIMx_SR register. Related interrupt or DMA transfer can occur if enabled.
Bit 5 COMG : Capture/compare control update generationThis bit can be set by software, it is automatically cleared by hardware
0: No action
1: CCxE, CCxNE and OCxM bits update (providing CCPC bit is set)
Note: This bit acts only on channels having a complementary output.
Bit 4 CC4G : Capture/compare 4 generationRefer to CC1G description
Bit 3 CC3G : Capture/compare 3 generationRefer to CC1G description
Bit 2 CC2G : Capture/compare 2 generationRefer to CC1G description
Bit 1 CC1G : Capture/compare 1 generationThis bit is set by software in order to generate an event, it is automatically cleared by hardware.
0: No action
1: A capture/compare event is generated on channel 1:
If channel CC1 is configured as output:
CC1IF flag is set, Corresponding interrupt or DMA request is sent if enabled.
If channel CC1 is configured as input:
The current value of the counter is captured in TIMx_CCR1 register. The CC1IF flag is set, the corresponding interrupt or DMA request is sent if enabled. The CC1OF flag is set if the CC1IF flag was already high.
Bit 0 UG : Update generationThis bit can be set by software, it is automatically cleared by hardware.
0: No action
1: Reinitialize the counter and generates an update of the registers. Note that the prescaler counter is cleared too (anyway the prescaler ratio is not affected). The counter is cleared if the center-aligned mode is selected or if DIR = 0 (upcounting), else it takes the autoreload value (TIMx_ARR) if DIR = 1 (downcounting).
37.6.7 TIMx capture/compare mode register 1 (TIMx_CCMR1)
(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x018
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
The same register can be used for input capture mode (this section) or for output compare mode (next section). The direction of a channel is defined by configuring the corresponding CCxS bits. All the other bits of this register have a different function for input capture and for output compare modes. It is possible to combine both modes independently (for example channel 1 in input capture mode and channel 2 in output compare mode).
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res | Res | Res | Res | Res | Res | Res | Res | Res | Res | Res | Res | Res | Res | Res | Res |
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| IC2F[3:0] | IC2PSC[1:0] | CC2S[1:0] | IC1F[3:0] | IC1PSC[1:0] | CC1S[1:0] | ||||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Input capture mode:
Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 15:12 IC2F[3:0] : Input capture 2 filter
Bits 11:10 IC2PSC[1:0] : Input capture 2 prescaler
Bits 9:8 CC2S[1:0] : Capture/compare 2 selection
This bitfield defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input.
00: CC2 channel is configured as output
01: CC2 channel is configured as input, tim_ic2 is mapped on tim_ti2
10: CC2 channel is configured as input, tim_ic2 is mapped on tim_ti1
11: CC2 channel is configured as input, tim_ic2 is mapped on tim_trc. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register)
Note: CC2S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC2E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).
Bits 7:4 IC1F[3:0] : Input capture 1 filter
This bitfield defines the frequency used to sample tim_ti1 input and the length of the digital filter applied to tim_ti1. The digital filter is made of an event counter in which N consecutive events are needed to validate a transition on the output:
0000: No filter, sampling is done at \( f_{DTS} \)
0001: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{tim\_ker\_ck} \) , N = 2
0010: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{tim\_ker\_ck} \) , N = 4
0011: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{tim\_ker\_ck} \) , N = 8
0100: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/2 \) , N = 6
0101: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/2 \) , N = 8
0110: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/4 \) , N = 6
0111: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/4 \) , N = 8
1000: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/8 \) , N = 6
1001: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/8 \) , N = 8
1010: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/16 \) , N = 5
1011: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/16 \) , N = 6
1100: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/16 \) , N = 8
1101: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/32 \) , N = 5
1110: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/32 \) , N = 6
1111: \( f_{SAMPLING} = f_{DTS}/32 \) , N = 8
Bits 3:2 IC1PSC[1:0] : Input capture 1 prescaler
This bitfield defines the ratio of the prescaler acting on CC1 input (tim_ic1). The prescaler is reset as soon as CC1E = 0 (TIMx_CCER register).
00: no prescaler, capture is done each time an edge is detected on the capture input
01: capture is done once every 2 events
10: capture is done once every 4 events
11: capture is done once every 8 events
Bits 1:0 CC1S[1:0] : Capture/compare 1 Selection
This bitfield defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input.
00: CC1 channel is configured as output
01: CC1 channel is configured as input, tim_ic1 is mapped on tim_ti1
10: CC1 channel is configured as input, tim_ic1 is mapped on tim_ti2
11: CC1 channel is configured as input, tim_ic1 is mapped on tim_trc. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register)
Note: CC1S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC1E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).
37.6.8 TIMx capture/compare mode register 1 [alternate] (TIMx_CCMR1)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x018
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
The same register can be used for output compare mode (this section) or for input capture mode (previous section). The direction of a channel is defined by configuring the corresponding CCxS bits. All the other bits of this register have a different function for input capture and for output compare modes. It is possible to combine both modes independently (for example channel 1 in input capture mode and channel 2 in output compare mode).
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | OC2M[3] | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | OC1M[3] |
| rw | rw | ||||||||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| OC2 CE | OC2M[2:0] | OC2 PE | OC2 FE | CC2S[1:0] | OC1 CE | OC1M[2:0] | OC1 PE | OC1 FE | CC1S[1:0] | ||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Output compare mode:
Bits 31:25 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 23:17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 15 OC2CE : Output compare 2 clear enable
Bits 24, 14:12 OC2M[3:0] : Output compare 2 mode
Bit 11 OC2PE : Output compare 2 preload enable
Bit 10 OC2FE : Output compare 2 fast enable
Bits 9:8 CC2S[1:0] : Capture/compare 2 selection
This bitfield defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input.
00: CC2 channel is configured as output
01: CC2 channel is configured as input, tim_ic2 is mapped on tim_ti2
10: CC2 channel is configured as input, tim_ic2 is mapped on tim_ti1
11: CC2 channel is configured as input, tim_ic2 is mapped on tim_trc. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through the TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register)
Note: CC2S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC2E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).
Bit 7 OC1CE : Output compare 1 clear enable
0: tim_oc1ref is not affected by the tim_ocref_clr_int signal
1: tim_oc1ref is cleared as soon as a High level is detected on tim_ocref_clr_int signal
(tim_ocref_clr input or tim_etrfr input)
Bits 16, 6:4 OC1M[3:0] : Output compare 1 mode
These bits define the behavior of the output reference signal tim_oc1ref from which tim_oc1 and tim_oc1n are derived. tim_oc1ref is active high whereas tim_oc1 and tim_oc1n active level depends on CC1P and CC1NP bits.
0000: Frozen - The comparison between the output compare register TIMx_CCR1 and the counter TIMx_CNT has no effect on the outputs. This mode can be used when the timer serves as a software timebase. When the frozen mode is enabled during timer operation, the output keeps the state (active or inactive) it had before entering the frozen state.
0001: Set channel 1 to active level on match. tim_oc1ref signal is forced high when the counter TIMx_CNT matches the capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1).
0010: Set channel 1 to inactive level on match. tim_oc1ref signal is forced low when the counter TIMx_CNT matches the capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1).
0011: Toggle - tim_oc1ref toggles when TIMx_CNT = TIMx_CCR1.
0100: Force inactive level - tim_oc1ref is forced low.
0101: Force active level - tim_oc1ref is forced high.
0110: PWM mode 1 - In upcounting, channel 1 is active as long as TIMx_CNT < TIMx_CCR1 else inactive. In downcounting, channel 1 is inactive (tim_oc1ref = 0) as long as TIMx_CNT > TIMx_CCR1 else active (tim_oc1ref = 1).
0111: PWM mode 2 - In upcounting, channel 1 is inactive as long as TIMx_CNT < TIMx_CCR1 else active. In downcounting, channel 1 is active as long as TIMx_CNT > TIMx_CCR1 else inactive.
1000: Retriggerable OPM mode 1 - In up-counting mode, the channel is active until a trigger event is detected (on tim_trgi signal). Then, a comparison is performed as in PWM mode 1 and the channel becomes active again at the next update. In down-counting mode, the channel is inactive until a trigger event is detected (on tim_trgi signal). Then, a comparison is performed as in PWM mode 1 and the channel becomes inactive again at the next update.
1001: Retriggerable OPM mode 2 - In up-counting mode, the channel is inactive until a trigger event is detected (on tim_trgi signal). Then, a comparison is performed as in PWM mode 2 and the channel becomes inactive again at the next update. In down-counting mode, the channel is active until a trigger event is detected (on tim_trgi signal). Then, a comparison is performed as in PWM mode 1 and the channel becomes active again at the next update.
1010: Reserved,
1011: Reserved,
1100: Combined PWM mode 1 - tim_oc1ref has the same behavior as in PWM mode 1. tim_oc1refc is the logical OR between tim_oc1ref and tim_oc2ref.
1101: Combined PWM mode 2 - tim_oc1ref has the same behavior as in PWM mode 2. tim_oc1refc is the logical AND between tim_oc1ref and tim_oc2ref.
1110: Asymmetric PWM mode 1 - tim_oc1ref has the same behavior as in PWM mode 1. tim_oc1refc outputs tim_oc1ref when the counter is counting up, tim_oc2ref when it is counting down.
1111: Asymmetric PWM mode 2 - tim_oc1ref has the same behavior as in PWM mode 2. tim_oc1refc outputs tim_oc1ref when the counter is counting up, tim_oc2ref when it is counting down.
Note: These bits can not be modified as long as LOCK level 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register) and CC1S = 00 (the channel is configured in output).
Note: In PWM mode, the OCREF level changes when the result of the comparison changes, when the output compare mode switches from “frozen” mode to “PWM” mode and when the output compare mode switches from “force active/inactive” mode to “PWM” mode.
Note: On channels having a complementary output, this bitfield is preloaded. If the CCPC bit is set in the TIMx_CR2 register then the OC1M active bits take the new value from the preloaded bits only when a COM event is generated.
Bit 3 OC1PE : Output compare 1 preload enable
0: Preload register on TIMx_CCR1 disabled. TIMx_CCR1 can be written at anytime, the new value is taken in account immediately.
1: Preload register on TIMx_CCR1 enabled. Read/Write operations access the preload register. TIMx_CCR1 preload value is loaded in the active register at each update event.
Note: These bits can not be modified as long as LOCK level 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register) and CC1S = 00 (the channel is configured in output).
Bit 2 OC1FE : Output compare 1 fast enable
This bit decreases the latency between a trigger event and a transition on the timer output. It must be used in one-pulse mode (OPM bit set in TIMx_CR1 register), to have the output pulse starting as soon as possible after the starting trigger.
0: CC1 behaves normally depending on counter and CCR1 values even when the trigger is ON. The minimum delay to activate CC1 output when an edge occurs on the trigger input is 5 clock cycles.
1: An active edge on the trigger input acts like a compare match on CC1 output. Then, OC is set to the compare level independently from the result of the comparison. Delay to sample the trigger input and to activate CC1 output is reduced to 3 clock cycles. OCFE acts only if the channel is configured in PWM1 or PWM2 mode.
Bits 1:0 CC1S[1:0] : Capture/compare 1 selection
This bitfield defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input.
00: CC1 channel is configured as output
01: CC1 channel is configured as input, tim_ic1 is mapped on tim_ti1
10: CC1 channel is configured as input, tim_ic1 is mapped on tim_ti2
11: CC1 channel is configured as input, tim_ic1 is mapped on tim_trc. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register)
Note: CC1S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC1E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).
37.6.9 TIMx capture/compare mode register 2 (TIMx_CCMR2) (x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x01C
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
The same register can be used for input capture mode (this section) or for output compare mode (next section). The direction of a channel is defined by configuring the corresponding CCxS bits. All the other bits of this register have a different function for input capture and for output compare modes. It is possible to combine both modes independently (for example channel 3 in input capture mode and channel 4 in output compare mode).
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. |
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| IC4F[3:0] | IC4PSC[1:0] | CC4S[1:0] | IC3F[3:0] | IC3PSC[1:0] | CC3S[1:0] | ||||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Input capture mode
Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 15:12 IC4F[3:0] : Input capture 4 filter
Bits 11:10 IC4PSC[1:0] : Input capture 4 prescaler
Bits 9:8 CC4S[1:0] : Capture/compare 4 selection
This bitfield defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input.
00: CC4 channel is configured as output
01: CC4 channel is configured as input, tim_ic4 is mapped on tim_ti4
10: CC4 channel is configured as input, tim_ic4 is mapped on tim_ti3
11: CC4 channel is configured as input, tim_ic4 is mapped on tim_trc. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register)
Note: CC4S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC4E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).
Bits 7:4 IC3F[3:0] : Input capture 3 filter
Bits 3:2 IC3PSC[1:0] : Input capture 3 prescaler
Bits 1:0 CC3S[1:0] : Capture/compare 3 selection
This bitfield defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input.
00: CC3 channel is configured as output
01: CC3 channel is configured as input, tim_ic3 is mapped on tim_ti3
10: CC3 channel is configured as input, tim_ic3 is mapped on tim_ti4
11: CC3 channel is configured as input, tim_ic3 is mapped on tim_trc. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register)
Note: CC3S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC3E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).
37.6.10 TIMx capture/compare mode register 2 [alternate]
(TIMx_CCMR2)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x01C
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
The same register can be used for output compare mode (this section) or for input capture mode (previous section). The direction of a channel is defined by configuring the corresponding CCxS bits. All the other bits of this register have a different function for input capture and for output compare modes. It is possible to combine both modes independently (for example channel 3 in input capture mode and channel 4 in output compare mode).
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | OC4M[3] | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | OC3M[3] |
| rw | rw | ||||||||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| OC4CE | OC4M[2:0] | OC4PE | OC4FE | CC4S[1:0] | OC3CE | OC3M[2:0] | OC3PE | OC3FE | CC3S[1:0] | ||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Output compare mode
Bits 31:25 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 23:17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 15 OC4CE : Output compare 4 clear enable
Bits 24, 14:12 OC4M[3:0] : Output compare 4 mode
Refer to OC3M[3:0] bit description
Bit 11 OC4PE : Output compare 4 preload enable
Bit 10 OC4FE : Output compare 4 fast enable
Bits 9:8 CC4S[1:0] : Capture/compare 4 selection
This bitfield defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input.
00: CC4 channel is configured as output
01: CC4 channel is configured as input, tim_ic4 is mapped on tim_ti4
10: CC4 channel is configured as input, tim_ic4 is mapped on tim_ti3
11: CC4 channel is configured as input, tim_ic4 is mapped on tim_trc. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register)
Note: CC4S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC4E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).
Bit 7 OC3CE : Output compare 3 clear enable
Bits 16, 6:4 OC3M[3:0] : Output compare 3 mode
These bits define the behavior of the output reference signal
tim_oc3ref
from which
tim_oc3
and
tim_oc3n
are derived.
tim_oc3ref
is active high whereas
tim_oc3
and
tim_oc3n
active level depends on
CC3P
and
CC3NP
bits.
0000: Frozen - The comparison between the output compare register
TIMx_CCR3
and the counter
TIMx_CNT
has no effect on the outputs. (this mode is used to generate a timing base).
0001: Set channel 3 to active level on match.
tim_oc3ref
signal is forced high when the counter
TIMx_CNT
matches the capture/compare register 3 (
TIMx_CCR3
).
0010: Set channel 3 to inactive level on match.
tim_oc3ref
signal is forced low when the counter
TIMx_CNT
matches the capture/compare register 3 (
TIMx_CCR3
).
0011: Toggle -
tim_oc3ref
toggles when
TIMx_CNT = TIMx_CCR3
.
0100: Force inactive level -
tim_oc3ref
is forced low.
0101: Force active level -
tim_oc3ref
is forced high.
0110: PWM mode 1 - In upcounting, channel 3 is active as long as
TIMx_CNT < TIMx_CCR3
else inactive. In downcounting, channel 3 is inactive (
tim_oc3ref = 0
) as long as
TIMx_CNT > TIMx_CCR3
else active (
tim_oc3ref = 1
).
0111: PWM mode 2 - In upcounting, channel 3 is inactive as long as
TIMx_CNT < TIMx_CCR3
else active. In downcounting, channel 3 is active as long as
TIMx_CNT > TIMx_CCR3
else inactive.
1000: Retriggerable OPM mode 1 - In up-counting mode, the channel is active until a trigger event is detected (on
tim_trgi
signal). Then, a comparison is performed as in PWM mode 1 and the channels becomes active again at the next update. In down-counting mode, the channel is inactive until a trigger event is detected (on
tim_trgi
signal). Then, a comparison is performed as in PWM mode 1 and the channels becomes inactive again at the next update.
1001: Retriggerable OPM mode 2 - In up-counting mode, the channel is inactive until a trigger event is detected (on
tim_trgi
signal). Then, a comparison is performed as in PWM mode 2 and the channels becomes inactive again at the next update. In down-counting mode, the channel is active until a trigger event is detected (on
tim_trgi
signal). Then, a comparison is performed as in PWM mode 1 and the channels becomes active again at the next update.
1010: Pulse on compare: a pulse is generated on
tim_oc3ref
upon
CCR3
match event, as per
PWPRSC[2:0]
and
PW[7:0]
bitfields programming in
TIMxECR
.
1011: Direction output. The
tim_oc3ref
signal is overridden by a copy of the
DIR
bit.
1100: Combined PWM mode 1 -
tim_oc3ref
has the same behavior as in PWM mode 1.
tim_oc3refc
is the logical OR between
tim_oc3ref
and
tim_oc4ref
.
1101: Combined PWM mode 2 -
tim_oc3ref
has the same behavior as in PWM mode 2.
tim_oc3refc
is the logical AND between
tim_oc3ref
and
tim_oc4ref
.
1110: Asymmetric PWM mode 1 -
tim_oc3ref
has the same behavior as in PWM mode 1.
tim_oc3refc
outputs
tim_oc3ref
when the counter is counting up,
tim_oc4ref
when it is counting down.
1111: Asymmetric PWM mode 2 -
tim_oc3ref
has the same behavior as in PWM mode 2.
tim_oc3refc
outputs
tim_oc3ref
when the counter is counting up,
tim_oc4ref
when it is counting down.
Note: These bits can not be modified as long as LOCK level 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register) and CC1S = 00 (the channel is configured in output).
Note: In PWM mode, the OCREF level changes only when the result of the comparison changes or when the output compare mode switches from “frozen” mode to “PWM” mode.
On channels having a complementary output, this bitfield is preloaded. If the
CCPC
bit is set in the
TIMx_CR2
register then the
OC3M
active bits take the new value from the preloaded bits only when a
COM
event is generated.
Bit 3 OC3PE : Output compare 3 preload enable
Bit 2 OC3FE : Output compare 3 fast enable
Bits 1:0 CC3S[1:0] : Capture/compare 3 selection
This bitfield defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input.
00: CC3 channel is configured as output
01: CC3 channel is configured as input, tim_ic3 is mapped on tim_ti3
10: CC3 channel is configured as input, tim_ic3 is mapped on tim_ti4
11: CC3 channel is configured as input, tim_ic3 is mapped on tim_trc. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register)
Note: CC3S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC3E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).
37.6.11 TIMx capture/compare enable register (TIMx_CCER)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x020
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | CC6P | CC6E | Res. | Res. | CC5P | CC5E |
| rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| CC4NP | CC4NE | CC4P | CC4E | CC3NP | CC3NE | CC3P | CC3E | CC2NP | CC2NE | CC2P | CC2E | CC1NP | CC1NE | CC1P | CC1E |
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Bits 31:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 21 CC6P : Capture/compare 6 output polarity
Refer to CC1P description
Bit 20 CC6E : Capture/compare 6 output enable
Refer to CC1E description
Bits 19:18 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 17 CC5P : Capture/compare 5 output polarity
Refer to CC1P description
Bit 16 CC5E : Capture/compare 5 output enable
Refer to CC1E description
Bit 15 CC4NP : Capture/compare 4 complementary output polarity
Refer to CC1NP description
Bit 14 CC4NE : Capture/compare 4 complementary output enable
Refer to CC1NE description
Bit 13 CC4P : Capture/compare 4 output polarity
Refer to CC1P description
Bit 12 CC4E : Capture/compare 4 output enable
Refer to CC1E description
Bit 11 CC3NP : Capture/compare 3 complementary output polarity
Refer to CC1NP description
Bit 10
CC3NE
: Capture/compare 3 complementary output enable
Refer to CC1NE description
Bit 9
CC3P
: Capture/compare 3 output polarity
Refer to CC1P description
Bit 8
CC3E
: Capture/compare 3 output enable
Refer to CC1E description
Bit 7
CC2NP
: Capture/compare 2 complementary output polarity
Refer to CC1NP description
Bit 6
CC2NE
: Capture/compare 2 complementary output enable
Refer to CC1NE description
Bit 5
CC2P
: Capture/compare 2 output polarity
Refer to CC1P description
Bit 4
CC2E
: Capture/compare 2 output enable
Refer to CC1E description
Bit 3 CC1NP : Capture/compare 1 complementary output polarity
CC1 channel configured as output:
0: tim_oc1n active high.
1: tim_oc1n active low.
CC1 channel configured as input:
This bit is used in conjunction with CC1P to define the polarity of tim_ti1fp1 and tim_ti2fp1.
Refer to CC1P description.
Note: This bit is not writable as soon as LOCK level 2 or 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register) and CC1S = 00 (channel configured as output).
Note: On channels having a complementary output, this bit is preloaded. If the CCPC bit is set in the TIMx_CR2 register then the CC1NP active bit takes the new value from the preloaded bit only when a Commutation event is generated.
Bit 2 CC1NE : Capture/compare 1 complementary output enable
0: Off - tim_oc1n is not active. tim_oc1n level is then function of MOE, OSSI, OSSR, OIS1, OIS1N and CC1E bits.
1: On - tim_oc1n signal is output on the corresponding output pin depending on MOE, OSSI, OSSR, OIS1, OIS1N and CC1E bits.
Note: On channels having a complementary output, this bit is preloaded. If the CCPC bit is set in the TIMx_CR2 register then the CC1NE active bit takes the new value from the preloaded bit only when a Commutation event is generated.
Bit 1 CC1P : Capture/compare 1 output polarity0: OC1 active high (output mode) / Edge sensitivity selection (input mode, see below)
1: OC1 active low (output mode) / Edge sensitivity selection (input mode, see below)
When CC1 channel is configured as input, both CC1NP/CC1P bits select the active polarity of TI1FP1 and TI2FP1 for trigger or capture operations.
CC1NP = 0, CC1P = 0: non-inverted/rising edge. The circuit is sensitive to TIxFP1 rising edge (capture or trigger operations in reset, external clock or trigger mode), TIxFP1 is not inverted (trigger operation in gated mode or encoder mode).
CC1NP = 0, CC1P = 1: inverted/falling edge. The circuit is sensitive to TIxFP1 falling edge (capture or trigger operations in reset, external clock or trigger mode), TIxFP1 is inverted (trigger operation in gated mode or encoder mode).
CC1NP = 1, CC1P = 1: non-inverted/both edges/ The circuit is sensitive to both TIxFP1 rising and falling edges (capture or trigger operations in reset, external clock or trigger mode), TIxFP1 is not inverted (trigger operation in gated mode). This configuration must not be used in encoder mode.
CC1NP = 1, CC1P = 0: the configuration is reserved, it must not be used.
Note: This bit is not writable as soon as LOCK level 2 or 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Note: On channels having a complementary output, this bit is preloaded. If the CCPC bit is set in the TIMx_CR2 register then the CC1P active bit takes the new value from the preloaded bit only when a Commutation event is generated.
Bit 0 CC1E : Capture/compare 1 output enable0: Capture mode disabled / OC1 is not active (see below)
1: Capture mode enabled / OC1 signal is output on the corresponding output pin
When CC1 channel is configured as output , the OC1 level depends on MOE, OSSI, OSSR, OIS1, OIS1N and CC1NE bits, regardless of the CC1E bits state. Refer to Table 399 for details.
Note: On channels having a complementary output, this bit is preloaded. If the CCPC bit is set in the TIMx_CR2 register then the CC1E active bit takes the new value from the preloaded bit only when a Commutation event is generated.
Table 399. Output control bits for complementary tim_ocx and tim_ocxn channels with break feature
| Control bits | Output states (1) | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| MOE bit | OSSI bit | OSSR bit | CCxE bit | CCxNE bit | tim_ocx output state | tim_ocxn output state |
| 1 | X | X | 0 | 0 | Output disabled (not driven by the timer: Hi-Z) tim_ocx = 0, tim_ocxn = 0 | |
| 0 | 0 | 1 | Output disabled (not driven by the timer: Hi-Z) tim_ocx = 0 | tim_ocxref + Polarity tim_ocxn = tim_ocxref xor CCxNP | ||
| 0 | 1 | 0 | tim_ocxref + Polarity tim_ocx = tim_ocxref xor CCxP | Output Disabled (not driven by the timer: Hi-Z) tim_ocxn = 0 | ||
| X | 1 | 1 | OCREF + Polarity + dead-time | Complementary to OCREF (not OCREF) + Polarity + dead-time | ||
| 1 | 0 | 1 | Off-State (output enabled with inactive state) tim_ocx = CCxP | tim_ocxref + Polarity tim_ocxn = tim_ocxref x or CCxNP | ||
| 1 | 1 | 0 | tim_ocxref + Polarity tim_ocx = tim_ocxref xor CCxP | Off-State (output enabled with inactive state) tim_ocxn = CCxNP | ||
| 0 | 0 | X | X | X | Output disabled (not driven by the timer: Hi-Z). | |
| 1 | 0 | 0 | ||||
| 0 | 1 | Off-State (output enabled with inactive state) Asynchronously: tim_ocx = CCxP, tim_ocxn = CCxNP (if tim_brk or tim_brk2 is triggered). Then (this is valid only if tim_brk is triggered), if the clock is present: tim_ocx = OISx and tim_ocxn = OISxN after a dead-time, assuming that OISx and OISxN do not correspond to OCX and tim_ocxn both in active state (may cause a short circuit when driving switches in half-bridge configuration). Note: tim_brk2 can only be used if OSSI = OSSR = 1. | ||||
| 1 | 0 | |||||
| 1 | 1 | |||||
1. When both outputs of a channel are not used (control taken over by GPIO), the OISx, OISxN, CCxP and CCxNP bits must be kept cleared.
Note: The state of the external I/O pins connected to the complementary tim_ocx and tim_ocxn channels depends on the tim_ocx and tim_ocxn channel state and the GPIO registers.
37.6.12 TIMx counter (TIMx_CNT)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x024
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| UIF CPY | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. |
| r | |||||||||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| CNT[15:0] | |||||||||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Bit 31 UIFCPY : UIF copy
This bit is a read-only copy of the UIF bit of the TIMx_ISR register. If the UIFREMAP bit in the TIMxCR1 is reset, bit 31 is reserved and read at 0.
Bits 30:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 15:0 CNT[15:0] : Counter value
Non-dithering mode (DITHEN = 0)
The register holds the counter value.
Dithering mode (DITHEN = 1)
The register only holds the non-dithered part in CNT[15:0]. The fractional part is not available.
37.6.13 TIMx prescaler (TIMx_PSC)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x028
Reset value: 0x0000
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| PSC[15:0] | |||||||||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Bits 15:0 PSC[15:0] : Prescaler value
The counter clock frequency ( \( f_{tim\_cnt\_ck} \) ) is equal to \( f_{tim\_psc\_ck} / (PSC[15:0] + 1) \) .
PSC contains the value to be loaded in the active prescaler register at each update event (including when the counter is cleared through UG bit of TIMx_EGR register or through trigger controller when configured in “reset mode”).
37.6.14 TIMx autoreload register (TIMx_ARR)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x02C
Reset value: 0x0000 FFFF
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | ARR[19:16] | |||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| ARR[15:0] | |||||||||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Bits 31:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 19:0 ARR[19:0] : Autoreload value
ARR is the value to be loaded in the actual autoreload register.
Refer to the Section 37.3.3: Time-base unit for more details about ARR update and behavior.
The counter is blocked while the autoreload value is null.
Non-dithering mode (DITHEN = 0)
The register holds the autoreload value.
Dithering mode (DITHEN = 1)
The register holds the integer part in ARR[19:4]. The ARR[3:0] bitfield contains the dithered part.
37.6.15 TIMx repetition counter register (TIMx_RCR)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x030
Reset value: 0x0000
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| REP[15:0] | |||||||||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Bits 15:0 REP[15:0] : Repetition counter reload value
This bitfield defines the update rate of the compare registers (i.e. periodic transfers from preload to active registers) when preload registers are enable. It also defines the update interrupt generation rate, if this interrupt is enable.
When the repetition down-counter reaches zero, an update event is generated and it restarts counting from REP value. As the repetition counter is reloaded with REP value only at the repetition update event UEV, any write to the TIMx_RCR register is not taken in account until the next repetition update event.
It means in PWM mode (REP+1) corresponds to:
- – the number of PWM periods in edge-aligned mode
- – the number of half PWM period in center-aligned mode.
37.6.16 TIMx capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x034
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | CCR1[19:16] | |||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| CCR1[15:0] | |||||||||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Bits 31:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 19:0 CCR1[19:0] : Capture/compare 1 value
- If channel CC1 is configured as output:
CCR1 is the value to be loaded in the actual capture/compare 1 register (preload value).
It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (bit OC1PE). Else the preload value is copied in the active capture/compare 1 register when an update event occurs.
The active capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the counter TIMx_CNT and signaled on tim_oc1 output.
Non-dithering mode (DITHEN = 0)
The register holds the compare value in CCR1[15:0]. The CCR1[19:16] bits are reset.
Dithering mode (DITHEN = 1)
The register holds the integer part in CCR1[19:4]. The CCR1[3:0] bitfield contains the dithered part. - If channel CC1 is configured as input:
CR1 is the counter value transferred by the last input capture 1 event (tim_ic1). The TIMx_CCR1 register is read-only and cannot be programmed.
Non-dithering mode (DITHEN = 0)
The register holds the capture value in CCR1[15:0]. The CCR1[19:16] bits are reset.
Dithering mode (DITHEN = 1)
The register holds the capture in CCR1[19:4]. The CCR1[3:0] bits are reset.
37.6.17 TIMx capture/compare register 2 (TIMx_CCR2)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x038
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | CCR2[19:16] | |||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| CCR2[15:0] | |||||||||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Bits 31:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 19:0 CCR2[19:0] : Capture/compare 2 value
If channel CC2 is configured as output: CCR2 is the value to be loaded in the actual capture/compare 2 register (preload value).
It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (bit OC2PE). Else the preload value is copied in the active capture/compare 2 register when an update event occurs.
The active capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the counter TIMx_CNT and signaled on tim_oc2 output.
Non-dithering mode (DITHEN = 0)
The register holds the compare value in CCR2[15:0]. The CCR2[19:16] bits are reset.
Dithering mode (DITHEN = 1)
The register holds the integer part in CCR2[19:4]. The CCR2[3:0] bitfield contains the dithered part.
If channel CC2 is configured as input: CCR2 is the counter value transferred by the last input capture 2 event (tim_ic2). The TIMx_CCR2 register is read-only and cannot be programmed.
Non-dithering mode (DITHEN = 0)
The register holds the capture value in CCR2[15:0]. The CCR2[19:16] bits are reset.
Dithering mode (DITHEN = 1)
The register holds the capture in CCR2[19:4]. The CCR2[3:0] bits are reset.
37.6.18 TIMx capture/compare register 3 (TIMx_CCR3)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x03C
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | CCR3[19:16] | |||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| CCR3[15:0] | |||||||||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Bits 31:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 19:0 CCR3[19:0] : Capture/compare value
If channel CC3 is configured as output: CCR3 is the value to be loaded in the actual capture/compare 3 register (preload value).
It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the TIMx_CCMR2 register (bit OC3PE). Else the preload value is copied in the active capture/compare 3 register when an update event occurs.
The active capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the counter TIMx_CNT and signaled on tim_oc3 output.
Non-dithering mode (DITHEN = 0)
The register holds the compare value in CCR3[15:0]. The CCR3[19:16] bits are reset.
Dithering mode (DITHEN = 1)
The register holds the integer part in CCR3[19:4]. The CCR3[3:0] bitfield contains the dithered part.
If channel CC3 is configured as input: CCR3 is the counter value transferred by the last input capture 3 event (tim_ic3). The TIMx_CCR3 register is read-only and cannot be programmed.
Non-dithering mode (DITHEN = 0)
The register holds the capture value in CCR3[15:0]. The CCR3[19:16] bits are reset.
Dithering mode (DITHEN = 1)
The register holds the capture in CCR3[19:4]. The CCR3[3:0] bits are reset.
37.6.19 TIMx capture/compare register 4 (TIMx_CCR4)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x040
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | CCR4[19:16] | |||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| CCR4[15:0] | |||||||||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Bits 31:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 19:0 CCR4[19:0] : Capture/compare value
If channel CC4 is configured as output: CCR4 is the value to be loaded in the actual capture/compare 4 register (preload value).
It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the TIMx_CCMR2 register (bit OC4PE). Else the preload value is copied in the active capture/compare 4 register when an update event occurs.
The active capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the counter TIMx_CNT and signalled on tim_oc4 output.
Non-dithering mode (DITHEN = 0)
The register holds the compare value in CCR4[15:0]. The CCR4[19:16] bits are reset.
Dithering mode (DITHEN = 1)
The register holds the integer part in CCR4[19:4]. The CCR4[3:0] bitfield contains the dithered part.
If channel CC4 is configured as input: CCR4 is the counter value transferred by the last input capture 4 event (tim_ic4). The TIMx_CCR4 register is read-only and cannot be programmed.
Non-dithering mode (DITHEN = 0)
The register holds the capture value in CCR4[15:0]. The CCR4[19:16] bits are reset.
Dithering mode (DITHEN = 1)
The register holds the capture in CCR4[19:4]. The CCR4[3:0] bits are reset.
37.6.20 TIMx break and dead-time register (TIMx_BDTR)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x044
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | BK2BID | BKBID | BK2DSRM | BKDSRM | BK2P | BK2E | BK2F[3:0] | BKF[3:0] | ||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | ||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| MOE | AOE | BKP | BKE | OSSR | OSSI | LOCK[1:0] | DTG[7:0] | ||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Note: As the bits BKBID/BK2BID/BK2P, BK2E, BK2F[3:0], BKF[3:0], AOE, BKP, BKE, OSSI, OSSR, and DTG[7:0] can be write-locked depending on the LOCK configuration, it can be necessary to configure all of them during the first write access to the TIMx_BDTR register.
Bits 31:30 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 29 BK2BID : Break2 bidirectional
Refer to BKBID description
Bit 28 BKBID : Break bidirectional
0: Break input tim_brk in input mode
1: Break input tim_brk in bidirectional mode
In the bidirectional mode (BKBID bit set to 1), the break input is configured both in input mode and in open drain output mode. Any active break event asserts a low logic level on the Break input to indicate an internal break event to external devices.
Note: This bit cannot be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Note: Any write operation to this bit takes a delay of 1 APB clock cycle to become effective.
Bit 27 BK2DSRM : Break2 disarm
Refer to BKDSRM description
Bit 26 BKDSRM : Break disarm
0: Break input tim_brk is armed
1: Break input tim_brk is disarmed
This bit is cleared by hardware when no break source is active.
The BKDSRM bit must be set by software to release the bidirectional output control (open-drain output in Hi-Z state) and then be polled it until it is reset by hardware, indicating that the fault condition has disappeared.
Note: Any write operation to this bit takes a delay of 1 APB clock cycle to become effective.
Bit 25 BK2P : Break 2 polarity
0: Break input tim_brk2 is active low
1: Break input tim_brk2 is active high
Note: This bit cannot be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Note: Any write operation to this bit takes a delay of 1 APB clock cycle to become effective.
Bit 24 BK2E : Break 2 enable
This bit enables the complete break 2 protection, see Figure 404: Break and Break2 circuitry overview .
0: Break2 function disabled
1: Break2 function enabled
Note: The BRKIN2 must only be used with OSSR = OSSI = 1.
Note: This bit cannot be modified when LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Note: Any write operation to this bit takes a delay of 1 APB clock cycle to become effective.
Bits 23:20 BK2F[3:0] : Break 2 filterThis bitfield defines the frequency used to sample tim_brk2 input and the length of the digital filter applied to tim_brk2. The digital filter is made of an event counter in which N consecutive events are needed to validate a transition on the output:
- 0000: No filter, tim_brk2 acts asynchronously
- 0001: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{tim\_ker\_ck}} \) , N = 2
- 0010: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{tim\_ker\_ck}} \) , N = 4
- 0011: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{tim\_ker\_ck}} \) , N = 8
- 0100: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/2 \) , N = 6
- 0101: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/2 \) , N = 8
- 0110: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/4 \) , N = 6
- 0111: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/4 \) , N = 8
- 1000: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/8 \) , N = 6
- 1001: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/8 \) , N = 8
- 1010: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/16 \) , N = 5
- 1011: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/16 \) , N = 6
- 1100: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/16 \) , N = 8
- 1101: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/32 \) , N = 5
- 1110: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/32 \) , N = 6
- 1111: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/32 \) , N = 8
Note: This bit cannot be modified when LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bits 19:16 BKF[3:0] : Break filterThis bitfield defines the frequency used to sample tim_brk input and the length of the digital filter applied to tim_brk. The digital filter is made of an event counter in which N consecutive events are needed to validate a transition on the output:
- 0000: No filter, tim_brk acts asynchronously
- 0001: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{tim\_ker\_ck}} \) , N = 2
- 0010: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{tim\_ker\_ck}} \) , N = 4
- 0011: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{tim\_ker\_ck}} \) , N = 8
- 0100: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/2 \) , N = 6
- 0101: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/2 \) , N = 8
- 0110: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/4 \) , N = 6
- 0111: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/4 \) , N = 8
- 1000: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/8 \) , N = 6
- 1001: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/8 \) , N = 8
- 1010: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/16 \) , N = 5
- 1011: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/16 \) , N = 6
- 1100: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/16 \) , N = 8
- 1101: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/32 \) , N = 5
- 1110: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/32 \) , N = 6
- 1111: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{DTS}}/32 \) , N = 8
Note: This bit cannot be modified when LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 15 MOE: Main output enableThis bit is cleared asynchronously by hardware as soon as one of the break inputs is active (tim_brk or tim_brk2). It is set by software or automatically depending on the AOE bit. It is acting only on the channels which are configured in output.
0: In response to a break 2 event. OC and OCN outputs are disabled
In response to a break event or if MOE is written to 0: OC and OCN outputs are disabled or forced to idle state depending on the OSSI bit.
1: OC and OCN outputs are enabled if their respective enable bits are set (CCxE, CCxNE in TIMx_CCER register).
See OC/OCN enable description for more details ( Section 37.6.11: TIMx capture/compare enable register (TIMx_CCER)(x = 1, 8) ).
Bit 14 AOE: Automatic output enable0: MOE can be set only by software
1: MOE can be set by software or automatically at the next update event (if none of the break inputs tim_brk and tim_brk2 is active)
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 13 BKP: Break polarity0: Break input tim_brk is active low
1: Break input tim_brk is active high
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Note: Any write operation to this bit takes a delay of 1 APB clock cycle to become effective.
Bit 12 BKE: Break enableThis bit enables the complete break protection (including all sources connected to tim_sys_brk and BKIN sources, as per Figure 404: Break and Break2 circuitry overview ).
0: Break function disabled
1: Break function enabled
Note: This bit cannot be modified when LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Note: Any write operation to this bit takes a delay of 1 APB clock cycle to become effective.
Bit 11 OSSR: Off-state selection for Run modeThis bit is used when MOE = 1 on channels having a complementary output which are configured as outputs. OSSR is not implemented if no complementary output is implemented in the timer.
See OC/OCN enable description for more details ( Section 37.6.11: TIMx capture/compare enable register (TIMx_CCER)(x = 1, 8) ).
0: When inactive, OC/OCN outputs are disabled (the timer releases the output control which is taken over by the GPIO logic, which forces a Hi-Z state).
1: When inactive, OC/OCN outputs are enabled with their inactive level as soon as CCxE = 1 or CCxNE = 1 (the output is still controlled by the timer).
Note: This bit can not be modified as soon as the LOCK level 2 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 10 OSSI : Off-state selection for idle modeThis bit is used when MOE = 0 due to a break event or by a software write, on channels configured as outputs.
See OC/OCN enable description for more details (
Section 37.6.11: TIMx capture/compare enable register (TIMx_CCER)(x = 1, 8)
).
0: When inactive, OC/OCN outputs are disabled (the timer releases the output control which is taken over by the GPIO logic and which imposes a Hi-Z state).
1: When inactive, OC/OCN outputs are first forced with their inactive level then forced to their idle level after the deadtime. The timer maintains its control over the output.
Note: This bit can not be modified as soon as the LOCK level 2 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bits 9:8 LOCK[1:0] : Lock configurationThese bits offer a write protection against software errors.
00: LOCK OFF - No bit is write protected.
01: LOCK Level 1 = DTG bits in TIMx_BDTR register, OISx and OISxN bits in TIMx_CR2 register and BKBID/BK2BID/BKE/BKP/AOE bits in TIMx_BDTR register can no longer be written.
10: LOCK Level 2 = LOCK Level 1 + CC Polarity bits (CCxP/CCxNP bits in TIMx_CCER register, as long as the related channel is configured in output through the CCxS bits) as well as OSSR and OSSI bits can no longer be written.
11: LOCK Level 3 = LOCK Level 2 + CC Control bits (OCxM and OCxPE bits in TIMx_CCMRx registers, as long as the related channel is configured in output through the CCxS bits) can no longer be written.
Note: The LOCK bits can be written only once after the reset. Once the TIMx_BDTR register has been written, their content is frozen until the next reset.
Bits 7:0 DTG[7:0] : Dead-time generator setupThis bitfield defines the duration of the dead-time inserted between the complementary outputs. DT correspond to this duration.
DTG[7:5] = 0xx => DT = DTG[7:0] ×
\(
t_{dtg}
\)
with
\(
t_{dtg} = t_{DTS}
\)
.
DTG[7:5] = 10x => DT = (64+DTG[5:0]) ×
\(
t_{dtg}
\)
with
\(
T_{dtg} = 2 \times t_{DTS}
\)
.
DTG[7:5] = 110 => DT = (32+DTG[4:0]) ×
\(
t_{dtg}
\)
with
\(
T_{dtg} = 8 \times t_{DTS}
\)
.
DTG[7:5] = 111 => DT = (32+DTG[4:0]) ×
\(
t_{dtg}
\)
with
\(
T_{dtg} = 16 \times t_{DTS}
\)
.
Example if
\(
T_{DTS} = 125
\)
ns (8 MHz), dead-time possible values are:
0 to 15875 ns by 125 ns steps,
16 µs to 31750 ns by 250 ns steps,
32 µs to 63 µs by 1 µs steps,
64 µs to 126 µs by 2 µs steps
Note: This bitfield can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1, 2 or 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
37.6.21 TIMx capture/compare register 5 (TIMx_CCR5)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x048
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| GC5C3 | GC5C2 | GC5C1 | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | CCR5[19:16] | |||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | |||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| CCR5[15:0] | |||||||||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Bit 31 GC5C3 : Group channel 5 and channel 3
Distortion on channel 3 output:
0: No effect of tim_oc5ref on tim_oc3refc
1: tim_oc3refc is the logical AND of tim_oc3ref and tim_oc5ref
This bit can either have immediate effect or be preloaded and taken into account after an update event (if preload feature is selected in TIMxCCMR2).
Note: it is also possible to apply this distortion on combined PWM signals.
Bit 30 GC5C2 : Group channel 5 and channel 2
Distortion on channel 2 output:
0: No effect of tim_oc5ref on tim_oc2refc
1: tim_oc2refc is the logical AND of tim_oc2ref and tim_oc5ref
This bit can either have immediate effect or be preloaded and taken into account after an update event (if preload feature is selected in TIMxCCMR1).
Note: it is also possible to apply this distortion on combined PWM signals.
Bit 29 GC5C1 : Group channel 5 and channel 1
Distortion on channel 1 output:
0: No effect of oc5ref on oc1refc
1: oc1refc is the logical AND of oc1ref and oc5ref
This bit can either have immediate effect or be preloaded and taken into account after an update event (if preload feature is selected in TIMxCCMR1).
Note: it is also possible to apply this distortion on combined PWM signals.
Bits 28:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 19:0 CCR5[19:0] : Capture/compare 5 value
CCR5 is the value to be loaded in the actual capture/compare 5 register (preload value).
It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the TIMx_CCMR3 register (bit OC5PE). Else the preload value is copied in the active capture/compare 5 register when an update event occurs.
The active capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the counter TIMx_CNT and signaled on tim_oc5 output.
Non-dithering mode (DITHEN = 0)
The register holds the compare value in CCR5[15:0]. The CCR5[19:16] bits are reset.
Dithering mode (DITHEN = 1)
The register holds the integer part in CCR5[19:4]. The CCR5[3:0] bitfield contains the dithered part.
37.6.22 TIMx capture/compare register 6 (TIMx_CCR6)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x04C
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | CCR6[19:16] | |||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| CCR6[15:0] | |||||||||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Bits 31:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 19:0 CCR6[19:0] : Capture/compare 6 value
CCR6 is the value to be loaded in the actual capture/compare 6 register (preload value).
It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the TIMx_CCMR3 register (bit OC6PE). Else the preload value is copied in the active capture/compare 6 register when an update event occurs.
The active capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the counter TIMx_CNT and signaled on tim_oc6 output.
Non-dithering mode (DITHEN = 0)
The register holds the compare value in CCR6[15:0]. The CCR6[19:16] bits are reset.
Dithering mode (DITHEN = 1)
The register holds the integer part in CCR6[19:4]. The CCR6[3:0] bitfield contains the dithered part.
37.6.23 TIMx capture/compare mode register 3 (TIMx_CCMR3) (x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x050
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
Refer to the above CCMR1 register description. Channels 5 and 6 can only be configured in output.
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | OC6M[3] | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | OC5M[3] |
| rw | rw | ||||||||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| OC6CE | OC6M[2:0] | OC6PE | OC6FE | Res. | Res. | OC5CE | OC5M[2:0] | OC5PE | OC5FE | Res. | Res. | ||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||
Bits 31:25 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 23:17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 15 OC6CE : Output compare 6 clear enable
Bits 24, 14:12 OC6M[3:0] : Output compare 6 mode
Bit 11 OC6PE : Output compare 6 preload enable
Bit 10 OC6FE : Output compare 6 fast enable
Bits 9:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 7 OC5CE : Output compare 5 clear enable
Bits 16, 6:4 OC5M[3:0] : Output compare 5 mode
Bit 3 OC5PE : Output compare 5 preload enable
Bit 2 OC5FE : Output compare 5 fast enable
Bits 1:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
37.6.24 TIMx timer deadtime register 2 (TIMx_DTR2)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x054
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | DTPE | DTAE |
| rw | rw | ||||||||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | DTGF[7:0] | |||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||||||
Bits 31:18 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 17 DTPE : Deadtime preload enable
- 0: Deadtime value is not preloaded
- 1: Deadtime value preload is enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1, 2 or 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 16 DTAE : Deadtime asymmetric enable
- 0: Deadtime on rising and falling edges are identical, and defined with DTG[7:0] register
- 1: Deadtime on rising edge is defined with DTG[7:0] register and deadtime on falling edge is defined with DTGF[7:0] bits.
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1, 2 or 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bits 15:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 7:0 DTGF[7:0] : Dead-time falling edge generator setup
This bitfield defines the duration of the dead-time inserted between the complementary outputs, on the falling edge.
DTGF[7:5] = 0xx => DTF = DTGF[7:0]x
\(
t_{dtg}
\)
with
\(
t_{dtg} = t_{DTS}
\)
.
DTGF[7:5] = 10x => DTF = (64+DTGF[5:0])x
\(
t_{dtg}
\)
with
\(
T_{dtg} = 2 \times t_{DTS}
\)
.
DTGF[7:5] = 110 => DTF = (32+DTGF[4:0])x
\(
t_{dtg}
\)
with
\(
T_{dtg} = 8 \times t_{DTS}
\)
.
DTGF[7:5] = 111 => DTF = (32+DTGF[4:0])x
\(
t_{dtg}
\)
with
\(
T_{dtg} = 16 \times t_{DTS}
\)
.
Example if
\(
T_{DTS} = 125
\)
ns (8 MHz), dead-time possible values are:
0 to 15875 ns by 125 ns steps,
16
\(
\mu s
\)
to 31750 ns by 250 ns steps,
32
\(
\mu s
\)
to 63
\(
\mu s
\)
by 1
\(
\mu s
\)
steps,
64
\(
\mu s
\)
to 126
\(
\mu s
\)
by 2
\(
\mu s
\)
steps
Note: This bitfield can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1, 2 or 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
37.6.25 TIMx timer encoder control register (TIMx_ECR)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x058
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | PWPRSC[2:0] | PW[7:0] | |||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | |||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | IPOS[1:0] | FIDX | IBLK[1:0] | IDIR[1:0] | IE | |||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||||||
Bits 31:27 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 26:24 PWPRSC[2:0] : Pulse width prescaler
This bitfield sets the clock prescaler for the pulse generator, as following:
Bits 23:16 PW[7:0] : Pulse width
This bitfield defines the pulse duration, as following:
Bits 15:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 7:6 IPOS[1:0] : Index positioning
In quadrature encoder mode (SMS[3:0] = 0001, 0010, 0011, 1110, 1111), this bit indicates in which AB input configuration the Index event resets the counter.
- 00: Index resets the counter when AB = 00
- 01: Index resets the counter when AB = 01
- 10: Index resets the counter when AB = 10
- 11: Index resets the counter when AB = 11
In directional clock mode or clock plus direction mode (SMS[3:0] = 1010, 1011, 1100, 1101), these bits indicates on which level the Index event resets the counter. In bidirectional clock mode, this applies for both clock inputs.
- x0: Index resets the counter when clock is 0
- x1: Index resets the counter when clock is 1
Note: IPOS[1] bit is not significant
Bit 5 FIDX : First index
This bit indicates if the first index only is taken into account
- 0: Index is always active
- 1: the first Index only resets the counter
Bits 4:3 IBLK[1:0] : Index blanking
This bit indicates if the Index event is conditioned by the tim_ti3 or tim_ti4 input
00: Index always active
01: Index disabled when tim_ti3 input is active, as per CC3P bitfield
10: Index disabled when tim_ti4 input is active, as per CC4P bitfield
11: Reserved
Bits 2:1 IDIR[1:0] : Index direction
This bit indicates in which direction the Index event resets the counter.
00: Index resets the counter whatever the direction
01: Index resets the counter when up-counting only
10: Index resets the counter when down-counting only
11: Reserved
Bit 0 IE : Index enable
This bit indicates if the Index event resets the counter.
0: Index disabled
1: Index enabled
37.6.26 TIMx timer input selection register (TIMx_TISEL)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x05C
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | TI4SEL[3:0] | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | TI3SEL[3:0] | ||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | TI2SEL[3:0] | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | TI1SEL[3:0] | ||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||||||
Bits 31:28 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 27:24 TI4SEL[3:0] : Selects tim_ti4[15:0] input
0000: tim_ti4_in0: TIMx_CH4
0001: tim_ti4_in1
...
1111: tim_ti4_in15
Refer to Section 37.3.2: TIM1/TIM8 pins and internal signals for interconnects list.
Bits 23:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 19:16 TI3SEL[3:0] : Selects tim_ti3[15:0] input
0000: tim_ti3_in0: TIMx_CH2
0001: tim_ti3_in1
...
1111: tim_ti3_in15
Refer to Section 37.3.2: TIM1/TIM8 pins and internal signals for interconnects list.
Bits 15:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 11:8 TI2SEL[3:0] : Selects tim_ti2[15:0] input
0000: tim_ti2_in0: TIMx_CH2
0001: tim_ti2_in1
...
1111: tim_ti2_in15
Refer to Section 37.3.2: TIM1/TIM8 pins and internal signals for interconnects list.
Bits 7:4 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 3:0 TI1SEL[3:0] : Selects tim_ti1[15:0] input
0000: tim_ti1_in0: TIMx_CH1
0001: tim_ti1_in1
...
1111: tim_ti1_in15
Refer to Section 37.3.2: TIM1/TIM8 pins and internal signals for interconnects list.
37.6.27 TIMx alternate function option register 1 (TIMx_AF1)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x060
Reset value: 0x0000 0001
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | ETRSEL[3:2] | |
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| ETRSEL[1:0] | BK CMP4P | BK CMP3P | BK CMP2P | BK CMP1P | BKINP | BK CMP8E | BK CMP7E | BK CMP6E | BK CMP5E | BK CMP4E | BK CMP3E | BK CMP2E | BK CMP1E | BKINE | |
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Bits 31:18 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 17:14 ETRSEL[3:0] : etr_in source selection
These bits select the etr_in input source.
0000: tim_etr0: TIMx_ETR input
0001: tim_etr1
...
1111: tim_etr15
Refer to Section 37.3.2: TIM1/TIM8 pins and internal signals for product specific implementation.
Note: These bits can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 13 BKCMP4P : tim_brk_cmp4 input polarity
This bit selects the tim_brk_cmp4 input sensitivity. It must be programmed together with the BKP polarity bit.
0: tim_brk_cmp4 input polarity is not inverted (active low if BKP = 0, active high if BKP = 1)
1: tim_brk_cmp4 input polarity is inverted (active high if BKP = 0, active low if BKP = 1)
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 12 BKCMP3P : tim_brk_cmp3 input polarityThis bit selects the tim_brk_cmp3 input sensitivity. It must be programmed together with the BKP polarity bit.
0: tim_brk_cmp3 input polarity is not inverted (active low if BKP = 0, active high if BKP = 1)
1: tim_brk_cmp3 input polarity is inverted (active high if BKP = 0, active low if BKP = 1)
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 11 BKCMP2P : tim_brk_cmp2 input polarityThis bit selects the tim_brk_cmp2 input sensitivity. It must be programmed together with the BKP polarity bit.
0: tim_brk_cmp2 input polarity is not inverted (active low if BKP = 0, active high if BKP = 1)
1: tim_brk_cmp2 input polarity is inverted (active high if BKP = 0, active low if BKP = 1)
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 10 BKCMP1P : tim_brk_cmp1 input polarityThis bit selects the tim_brk_cmp1 input sensitivity. It must be programmed together with the BKP polarity bit.
0: tim_brk_cmp1 input polarity is not inverted (active low if BKP = 0, active high if BKP = 1)
1: tim_brk_cmp1 input polarity is inverted (active high if BKP = 0, active low if BKP = 1)
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 9 BKINP : TIMx_BKIN input polarityThis bit selects the TIMx_BKIN alternate function input sensitivity. It must be programmed together with the BKP polarity bit.
0: TIMx_BKIN input polarity is not inverted (active low if BKP = 0, active high if BKP = 1)
1: TIMx_BKIN input polarity is inverted (active high if BKP = 0, active low if BKP = 1)
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 8 BKCMP8E : tim_brk_cmp8 enableThis bit enables the tim_brk_cmp8 for the timer's tim_brk input. tim_brk_cmp8 output is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk sources.
0: tim_brk_cmp8 input disabled
1: tim_brk_cmp8 input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 7 BKCMP7E : tim_brk_cmp7 enableThis bit enables the tim_brk_cmp7 for the timer's tim_brk input. tim_brk_cmp7 output is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk sources.
0: tim_brk_cmp7 input disabled
1: tim_brk_cmp7 input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 6 BKCMP6E : tim_brk_cmp6 enableThis bit enables the tim_brk_cmp6 for the timer's tim_brk input. tim_brk_cmp6 output is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk sources.
0: tim_brk_cmp6 input disabled
1: tim_brk_cmp6 input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 5 BKCMP5E : tim_brk_cmp5 enableThis bit enables the tim_brk_cmp5 for the timer's tim_brk input. tim_brk_cmp5 output is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk sources.
0: tim_brk_cmp5 input disabled
1: tim_brk_cmp5 input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 4 BKCMP4E : tim_brk_cmp4 enableThis bit enables the tim_brk_cmp4 for the timer's tim_brk input. tim_brk_cmp4 output is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk sources.
0: tim_brk_cmp4 input disabled
1: tim_brk_cmp4 input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 3 BKCMP3E : tim_brk_cmp3 enableThis bit enables the tim_brk_cmp3 for the timer's tim_brk input. tim_brk_cmp3 output is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk sources.
0: tim_brk_cmp3 input disabled
1: tim_brk_cmp3 input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 2 BKCMP2E : tim_brk_cmp2 enableThis bit enables the tim_brk_cmp2 for the timer's tim_brk input. tim_brk_cmp2 output is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk sources.
0: tim_brk_cmp2 input disabled
1: tim_brk_cmp2 input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 1 BKCMP1E : tim_brk_cmp1 enableThis bit enables the tim_brk_cmp1 for the timer's tim_brk input. tim_brk_cmp1 output is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk sources.
0: tim_brk_cmp1 input disabled
1: tim_brk_cmp1 input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 0 BKINE : TIMx_BKIN input enableThis bit enables the TIMx_BKIN alternate function input for the timer's tim_brk input. TIMx_BKIN input is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk sources.
0: TIMx_BKIN input disabled
1: TIMx_BKIN input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Note: Refer to Section 37.3.2: TIM1/TIM8 pins and internal signals for product specific implementation.
37.6.28 TIMx alternate function register 2 (TIMx_AF2)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x064
Reset value: 0x0000 0001
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | OCRSEL[2:0] | ||
| rw | rw | rw | |||||||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| Res. | Res. | BK2C MP4P | BK2C MP3P | BK2C MP2P | BK2C MP1P | BK2IN P | BK2CM P8E | BK2C MP7E | BK2C MP6E | BK2C MP5E | BK2C MP4E | BK2CMP 3E | BK2CMP 2E | BK2CM P1E | BK2INE |
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | ||
Bits 31:19 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 18:16 OCRSEL[2:0] : ocref_clr source selection
These bits select the ocref_clr input source.
000: tim_ocref_clr0
001: tim_ocref_clr1
...
111: tim_ocref_clr7
Refer to Section 37.3.2: TIM1/TIM8 pins and internal signals for product specific information.
Note: These bits can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bits 15:14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bit 13 BK2CMP4P : tim_brk2_cmp4 input polarity
This bit selects the tim_brk2_cmp4 input sensitivity. It must be programmed together with the BK2P polarity bit.
0: tim_brk2_cmp4 input polarity is not inverted (active low if BK2P = 0, active high if BK2P = 1)
1: tim_brk2_cmp4 input polarity is inverted (active high if BK2P = 0, active low if BK2P = 1)
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 12 BK2CMP3P : tim_brk2_cmp3 input polarity
This bit selects the tim_brk2_cmp3 input sensitivity. It must be programmed together with the BK2P polarity bit.
0: tim_brk2_cmp3 input polarity is not inverted (active low if BK2P = 0, active high if BK2P = 1)
1: tim_brk2_cmp3 input polarity is inverted (active high if BK2P = 0, active low if BK2P = 1)
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 11 BK2CMP2P : tim_brk2_cmp2 input polarity
This bit selects the tim_brk2_cmp2 input sensitivity. It must be programmed together with the BK2P polarity bit.
0: tim_brk2_cmp2 input polarity is not inverted (active low if BK2P = 0, active high if BK2P = 1)
1: tim_brk2_cmp2 input polarity is inverted (active high if BK2P = 0, active low if BK2P = 1)
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 10 BK2CMP1P : tim_brk2_cmp1 input polarityThis bit selects the tim_brk2_cmp1 input sensitivity. It must be programmed together with the BK2P polarity bit.
0: tim_brk2_cmp1 input polarity is not inverted (active low if BK2P = 0, active high if BK2P = 1)
1: tim_brk2_cmp1 input polarity is inverted (active high if BK2P = 0, active low if BK2P = 1)
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 9 BK2INP : TIMx_BKIN2 input polarityThis bit selects the TIMx_BKIN2 alternate function input sensitivity. It must be programmed together with the BK2P polarity bit.
0: TIMx_BKIN2 input polarity is not inverted (active low if BK2P = 0, active high if BK2P = 1)
1: TIMx_BKIN2 input polarity is inverted (active high if BK2P = 0, active low if BK2P = 1)
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 8 BK2CMP8E : tim_brk2_cmp8 enableThis bit enables the tim_brk2_cmp8 for the timer's tim_brk2 input. tim_brk2_cmp8 output is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk2 sources.
0: tim_brk2_cmp8 input disabled
1: tim_brk2_cmp8 input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 7 BK2CMP7E : tim_brk2_cmp7 enableThis bit enables the tim_brk2_cmp7 for the timer's tim_brk2 input. tim_brk2_cmp7 output is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk2 sources.
0: tim_brk2_cmp7 input disabled
1: tim_brk2_cmp7 input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 6 BK2CMP6E : tim_brk2_cmp6 enableThis bit enables the tim_brk2_cmp6 for the timer's tim_brk2 input. tim_brk2_cmp6 output is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk2 sources.
0: tim_brk2_cmp6 input disabled
1: tim_brk2_cmp6 input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 5 BK2CMP5E : tim_brk2_cmp5 enableThis bit enables the tim_brk2_cmp5 for the timer's tim_brk2 input. tim_brk2_cmp5 output is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk2 sources.
0: tim_brk2_cmp5 input disabled
1: tim_brk2_cmp5 input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 4 BK2CMP4E : tim_brk2_cmp4 enableThis bit enables the tim_brk2_cmp4 for the timer's tim_brk2 input. tim_brk2_cmp4 output is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk2 sources.
0: tim_brk2_cmp4 input disabled
1: tim_brk2_cmp4 input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 3 BK2CMP3E : tim_brk2_cmp3 enableThis bit enables the tim_brk2_cmp3 for the timer's tim_brk2 input. tim_brk2_cmp3 output is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk2 sources.
0: tim_brk2_cmp3 input disabled
1: tim_brk2_cmp3 input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 2 BK2CMP2E : tim_brk2_cmp2 enableThis bit enables the tim_brk2_cmp2 for the timer's tim_brk2 input. tim_brk2_cmp2 output is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk2 sources.
0: tim_brk2_cmp2 input disabled
1: tim_brk2_cmp2 input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 1 BK2CMP1E : tim_brk2_cmp1 enableThis bit enables the tim_brk2_cmp1 for the timer's tim_brk2 input. tim_brk2_cmp1 output is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk2 sources.
0: tim_brk2_cmp1 input disabled
1: tim_brk2_cmp1 input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Bit 0 BK2INE : TIMx_BKIN2 input enableThis bit enables the TIMx_BKIN2 alternate function input for the timer's tim_brk2 input.
TIMx_BKIN2 input is 'ORed' with the other tim_brk2 sources.
0: TIMx_BKIN2 input disabled
1: TIMx_BKIN2 input enabled
Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).
Note: Refer to Section 37.3.2: TIM1/TIM8 pins and internal signals for product specific implementation.
37.6.29 TIMx DMA control register (TIMx_DCR)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x3DC
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | DBSS[3:0] | |||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||||||||||
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| Res. | Res. | Res. | DBL[4:0] | Res. | Res. | Res. | DBA[4:0] | ||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | ||||||
Bits 31:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 19:16 DBSS[3:0] : DMA burst source selection
This bitfield defines the interrupt source that triggers the DMA burst transfers (the timer recognizes a burst transfer when a read or a write access is done to the TIMx_DMAR address).
0000: Reserved
0001: Update
0010: CC1
0011: CC2
0100: CC3
0101: CC4
0110: COM
0111: Trigger
Others: reserved
Bits 15:13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 12:8 DBL[4:0] : DMA burst length
This 5-bit vector defines the length of DMA transfers (the timer recognizes a burst transfer when a read or a write access is done to the TIMx_DMAR address), i.e. the number of transfers. Transfers can be in half-words or in bytes (see example below).
00000: 1 transfer
00001: 2 transfers
00010: 3 transfers
...
11010: 26 transfers
Example: Let us consider the following transfer: DBL = 7 bytes & DBA = TIM2_CR1.
–If DBL = 7 bytes and DBA = TIM2_CR1 represents the address of the byte to be transferred, the address of the transfer is given by the following equation:
(TIMx_CR1 address) + DBA + (DMA index), where DMA index = DBL
In this example, 7 bytes are added to (TIMx_CR1 address) + DBA, which gives us the address from/to which the data are copied. In this case, the transfer is done to 7 registers starting from the following address: (TIMx_CR1 address) + DBA
According to the configuration of the DMA Data Size, several cases may occur:
–If the DMA Data Size is configured in half-words, 16-bit data are transferred to each of the 7 registers.
–If the DMA Data Size is configured in bytes, the data are also transferred to 7 registers: the first register contains the first MSB byte, the second register, the first LSB byte and so on.
So with the transfer Timer, one also has to specify the size of data transferred by DMA.
Bits 7:5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
Bits 4:0 DBA[4:0] : DMA base address
This 5-bits vector defines the base-address for DMA transfers (when read/write access are done through the TIMx_DMAR address). DBA is defined as an offset starting from the address of the TIMx_CR1 register.
Example:
00000: TIMx_CR1
00001: TIMx_CR2
00010: TIMx_SMCR
...
37.6.30 TIMx DMA address for full transfer (TIMx_DMAR)(x = 1, 8)
Address offset: 0x3E0
Reset value: 0x0000 0000
| 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| DMAB[31:16] | |||||||||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
| 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
| DMAB[15:0] | |||||||||||||||
| rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw | rw |
Bits 31:0 DMAB[31:0] : DMA register for burst accesses
A read or write operation to the DMAR register accesses the register located at the address (TIMx_CR1 address) + (DBA + DMA index) x 4
where TIMx_CR1 address is the address of the control register 1, DBA is the DMA base address configured in TIMx_DCR register, DMA index is automatically controlled by the DMA transfer, and ranges from 0 to DBL (DBL configured in TIMx_DCR).
37.6.31 TIMx register map
TIMx registers are mapped as 16-bit addressable registers as described in the table below:
Table 400. TIMx register map and reset values
| Offset | Register name | 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 | 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0x000 | TIMx_CR1 | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | DITHEN | UIFREMA | Res. | CKD [1:0] | ARPE | CMS [1:0] | DIR | OPM | URS | UDIS | CEN | |||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0x004 | TIMx_CR2 | Res. | Res. | Res. | ADSYNC | Res. | Res. | MMS[3] | Res. | MMS2[3:0] | Res. | OIS6 | Res. | OIS5 | OIS4N | OIS4 | OIS3N | OIS3 | OIS2N | OIS2 | OIS1N | OIS1 | T1IS | MMS [2:0] | CCDS | CCUS | Res. | CCPC | ||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||
| 0x008 | TIMx_SMCR | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | SMSPS | SMSPE | Res. | Res. | TS [4:3] | Res. | Res. | Res. | SMS[3] | ETP | ECE | ETP S [1:0] | ETF[3:0] | Res. | MSM | TS[2:0] | OCCS | SMS[2:0] | |||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||
| 0x00C | TIMx_DIER | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | TERRIE | IERRIE | DIRIE | IDXIE | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | TDE | COMDE | CC4DE | CC3DE | CC2DE | CC1DE | UDE | BIE | TIE | COMIE | CC4IE | CC3IE | CC2IE | CC1IE | UIE | |
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||
| 0x010 | TIMx_SR | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | TERRF | IERRF | DIRF | IDXF | Res. | Res. | CC6IF | CC5IF | Res. | Res. | SBIF | CC4OF | CC3OF | CC2OF | CC1OF | B2IF | BIF | TIF | COMIF | CC4IF | CC3IF | CC2IF | CC1IF | UIF | |
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||
| 0x014 | TIMx_EGR | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | B2G | BG | TG | COMG | CC4G | CC3G | CC2G | CC1G | UG | |
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
Table 400. TIMx register map and reset values (continued)
| Offset | Register name | 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 | 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0x018 | TIMx_CCMR1 Input Capture mode | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | IC2F[3:0] | IC2 PSC [1:0] | CC2 S [1:0] | IC1F[3:0] | IC1 PSC [1:0] | CC1 S [1:0] | ||||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||
| TIMx_CCMR1 Output Compare mode | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | OC2M[3] | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | OC1M[3] | OC2CE | OC2M[2:0] | OC2PE | OC2FE | CC2 S [1:0] | OC1CE | OC1M[2:0] | OC1PE | OC1FE | CC1 S [1:0] | |||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||
| 0x01C | TIMx_CCMR2 | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | OC4M[3] | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | OC3M[3] | OC4CE | OC4M[2:0] | OC4PE | OC4FE | CC4 S [1:0] | OC3CE | OC3M[2:0] | OC3PE | OC3FE | CC3 S [1:0] | ||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||
| TIMx_CCMR2 | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | IC4F[3:0] | IC4 PSC [1:0] | CC4 S [1:0] | IC3F[3:0] | IC3 PSC [1:0] | CC3 S [1:0] | |||||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||
| 0x020 | TIMx_CCER | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | CC6P | CC6E | Res. | Res. | CC5P | CC5E | CC4NP | CC4NE | CC4P | CC4E | CC3NP | CC3NE | CC3P | CC3E | CC2NP | CC2NE | CC2P | CC2E | CC1NP | CC1NE | CC1P | CC1E |
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||
| 0x024 | TIMx_CNT | UIFCPY | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | CNT[15:0] | |||||||||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||
| 0x028 | TIMx_PSC | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | PSC[15:0] | |||||||||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||
| 0x02C | TIMx_ARR | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | ARR[19:0] | |||||||||||||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | |||||||||||||
| 0x030 | TIMx_RCR | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | REP[15:0] | |||||||||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||
| 0x034 | TIMx_CCR1 | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | CCR1[19:0] | |||||||||||||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||
| 0x038 | TIMx_CCR2 | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | CCR2[19:0] | |||||||||||||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||
| 0x03C | TIMx_CCR3 | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | CCR3[19:0] | |||||||||||||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||
| 0x040 | TIMx_CCR4 | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | CCR4[19:0] | |||||||||||||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||
| 0x044 | TIMx_BDTR | Res. | Res. | BK2BID | BKBID | BK2DSRM | BKDSRM | BK2P | BK2E | BK2F[3:0] | BKF[3:0] | MOE | AOE | BKP | BKE | OSSR | OSSI | LOC K [1:0] | DT[7:0] | ||||||||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||
Table 400. TIMx register map and reset values (continued)
| Offset | Register name | 31 | 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 | 24 | 23 | 22 | 21 | 20 | 19 | 18 | 17 | 16 | 15 | 14 | 13 | 12 | 11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0x048 | TIMx_CCR5 | GC5C3 | GC5C2 | GC5C1 | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | CCR5[19:0] | |||||||||||||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||
| 0x04C | TIMx_CCR6 | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | CCR6[19:0] | |||||||||||||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||
| 0x050 | TIMx_CCMR3 | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | OC6M[3] | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | OC5M[3] | OC6CE | OC6M [2:0] | OC6PE | OC6FE | Res. | Res. | OC5CE | OC5M [2:0] | OC5PE | OC5FE | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | ||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||
| 0x054 | TIMx_DTR2 | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | DTPE | DTAE | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | DTGF[7:0] | ||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0x058 | TIMx_ECR | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | PWPRSC[2:0] | PW[7:0] | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | IPOS [1:0] | FIDX | IBLK [1:0] | IDIR [1:0] | IE | |||||||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||
| 0x05C | TIMx_TISEL | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | TI4SEL[3:0] | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | TI3SEL[3:0] | Res. | Res. | Res. | TI2SEL[3:0] | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | TI1SEL[3:0] | ||||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||
| 0x060 | TIMx_AF1 | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | ETRSEL [3:0] | BK2CMP4P | BK2CMP3P | BK2CMP2P | BK2CMP1P | BKINP | BK2CMP8E | BK2CMP7E | BK2CMP6E | BK2CMP5E | BK2CMP4E | BK2CMP3E | BK2CMP2E | BK2CMP1E | BKINE | ||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 1 | ||||||||||||||||
| 0x064 | TIMx_AF2 | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | OCRSEL [2:0] | Res. | BK2CMP4P | BK2CMP3P | BK2CMP2P | BK2CMP1P | BK2INP | BK2CMP8E | BK2CMP7E | BK2CMP6E | BK2CMP5E | BK2CMP4E | BK2CMP3E | BK2CMP2E | BK2CMP1E | BK2INE | ||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 1 | ||||||||||||||||
| 0x068..0x3D8 | Reserved | Res. | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0x3DC | TIMx_DCR | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | Res. | DBSS[3:0] | Res. | Res. | DBL[4:0] | Res. | Res. | Res. | DBA[4:0] | |||||||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||
| 0x3E0 | TIMx_DMAR | DMAB[31:0] | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reset value | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |